switches data switches and hubs servers software etc is

Document Sample
switches data switches and hubs servers software etc is Powered By Docstoc
					                                             SECTION 26 10 00

                                  BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, incTuding Generat Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   RELATED SECTIONS

      A.    Requirements specified within this section apply to all sections in Division 26, Electrical. Work
            specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections.

1.3   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1584, Guide for Performing Arc-
                 Flash Calculations.
                 National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
                 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and
                 Labels.
                 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
                 a.    70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                 b.    70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces

1.4   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:
           1.   Provide manufacturers' data for the following:
                     Electrical service components.
                    Telephone service components.
                     Nameplates, signs, and labels.

1.5   ELECTRIC AND TELEPHONE SERVICE DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY

           Incoming telephone service facilities provided by the serving utilities as part of their normal
           obligation to customers is work provided outside this Contract. Under this Contract provide
           customer required service provisions and electrical work.

           Interior telecommunications central and station equipment (telephone instruments, telephone
           switches, data switches, and hubs, servers, software, etc.) is work provided outside this
           Contract. Under this Contract provide raceways, outlet and junction boxes, cover plates, and
           pull wires.

1,6   SUMMARYOFWORK

      A.   The project consists of major electrical work that consists of the following:
               Provide, install, and test the switchgear.
               Provide, install, and test two ow voltage motor control centers.



ONWASA                                                                      BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 10 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8.
                    Provide, install, and test the various panelboards and dry type transformers as shown on
                    the Drawings.
                    Provide, install, and test three 100 HP and three 200 HP stand alone adjustable
                    frequency drives.

1.7     ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

        A.    The following areas are classified hazardous Class I, Division 1, Group D, due to the potential
              for occurrence of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to
              corrosive environment, Use materials and methods required for such areas.
                   Inside wet wells containing wastewater.
                   Inside pretreatment covered channels.
                   Inside splitter box form top of water to top of basin.
                   Inside scum pit.

        B.    The following areas are classified hazardous, Class I, Division 2, Group D, due to the potential
              for accumulation of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to
              corrosive environment. Use materials and methods required for such areas.
                   Enclosed, below grade valve and metering vaults with closed piping systems containing
                   wastewater.
                   Odor control area with-in 3 feet of odor control piping, fans and biofilter.
                   Area 13 inches above and 10 feet horizontally from top of BRB basin and clarifier basins.
                   Area 13 inches above and 3 feet horizontally from scum pit hatch and cover openings.

        C.    The following areas are classified nonhazardous, wet, and corrosive. Use materials and
              methods required for such areas.
                  Inside of dewatering wet well.
                    Within 10-foot envelope around lamp washdown area and UV Cleaning Station in UV
                    Disinfection Building.
                    Areas within Chemical Building.
                    Outdoor above grade areas at pretreatment, splitter box, BRB basins, and clarifiers.

        D.    The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and methods
              required for such areas.
                   Outdoor above-grade areas not covered above.
                   Equipment Room in UV Disinfection Building.
                   Below-grade vaults.

        E.    The following areas are classified as indoor and dry:
              1.   Electrical Room.

              The following areas are not classified. Use dust-tight and oil-tight NEMA 12 materials and
              methods.
              1.  Areas not covered above.

1.8     AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION APPROVAL

        A.    Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where
              required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled
              or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
              AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.




BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                     ONWASA
26 10 00 2                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. DOUS
            Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
            Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL
            listing mark or label.

            Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
            hazardous area indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1    GENERAL

            Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide
            products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be
            products of the same manufacturer.

            Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be capable of
            continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient temperature range of
            40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

            Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous operation at their
            specified rating within the ambient temperature range stated in Section 01 60 00 - Material
            and Equipment.

            Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields.

            Electrical ratings of materials and equipment that are reduced by increased elevation shall be
            de-rated as required for Site elevation specified in Section 01 60 00 Material and Equipment.

2.2    EQUIPMENT FINISH

       A.   Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer
            has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with light gray color finish as approved
            by Engineer.

2.3    NAMEPLATES

            Material: Laminated plastic.

            Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.

            Color: White, engraved to a black core.

            Letter Height:
                 Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch.
                 Other electrical equipment: 3/8 inch.

2.4   SIGNS AND LABELS
          1. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.




ONWASA                                                                        BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     261000-3
ARCAD1S                                                                                       Printed: 4,5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

              Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless
              specificaUy dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for actual location of equipment and
              devices and for proper routing and support of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer

              Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets, equipment, and other
              electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with openings, structural
              members, and components of other systems and equipment having fixed Locations. In the
              event of conflicts, notify Engineer in writing.

              Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified.

              Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.

              Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building
              surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform cutting, channeling, chasing,
              or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the
              installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and
              equipment. Following such work, restore surfaces to original condition.

3.2     ANCHORING AND MOUNTING

        A.    Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements
              for seismic zone criteria given in Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment.

3.3     COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY

        A.    Homerun circuits shown on Drawings indicate functional wiring requirements for power and
              control circuits. Circuits may be combined into common raceways in accordance with the
              following requirements:
              1.   Analog control circuits from devices in same general area to same destination.
                         No power or AC discrete control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with
                         analog circuits.
                         No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire
                         alarm circuits, paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1
                         circuits.
                        Analog circuits shall be continuous from source to destination. Do not add TJB,
                         splice, or combine into a multi-pair cable without authorization of Engineer.
                         Raceways shall be sized per General Circuit and Raceway Schedule and do not
                        exceed 40 percent fill.
                         Changes shall be documented on record drawings.
              2.    Discrete control circuits from devices in the same general area to the same destination.
                         No power or analog control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with discrete
                        circuits.
                         No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire
                        alarm circuits, and paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1
                        circuits.
                         Raceways shall be sized per the General Circuit and Raceway Schedule and do not
                        exceed 40 percent fill.
                        Changes shall be documented on record drawings.



BASIC ELECTRICAL REQ                                                                                    ONWASA
261000-4                 WREMENTS                               NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                      ARCADIS
                                                                                      Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
           3.   Power circuits from loads in same general area to same source location (such as:
                panelboard, switchboard, row voltage motor control center).
                    Lighting Circuits: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway.
                    Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating
                    is required by NEC.
                    Receptacle Circuits, 120-Volt Only: Combine no more than three circuits to a single
                    raceway. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit. Contractor shall be
                    responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC.
                     All Other Power Circuits. Do not combine power circuits without authorization of
                     Engineer.

3,4   NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS

      A.   Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs:
                Field mark switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboards to warn qualified persons
                of potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons before
                working on energized equipment.
                Calculate arc flash boundary and energy in accordance with NFPA 70E. Determine level
                of personnel protective equipment (PPE) required. Warning label on equipment shall
                include flash hazard boundary, energy level, PPE level and description, shock hazard,
                bolted fault current, and equipment name. Refer to Section 26 10 06, Electrical Systems
                Analysis for additional information.
                Use available short circuit current from study required in Section 26 10 06, Electrical
                Systems Analysis as basis for calculations.

      B.   Multiple Power Supply Sign: Install permanent plaque or directory at each service disconnect
           location denoting other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying the building, and the
           area served by each.

      C.   Equipment Nameplates:
                Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including switchgear, switchboards,
                motor control centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal junction boxes,
                disconnect switches, switches and control stations.
                Switchgear, motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates shall
                include equipment designation.
                Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include name and
                number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.
                Switchboard and panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service
                voltage, and phases.

3.5   LOAD BALANCE

           Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment.

           Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, switchgear,
           panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required.

           When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain
           accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit
           arrangement.




ONWASA                                                                     BASiC ELECTRiCAL REQUIREMENTS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 10 00.- 5
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
3.6    CLEANING AND TOUCHIJP PAINTING

      A.    Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and equipment by
            removing debris and vacuuming.

            Touchup Paint:
                  Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of devices and
                  equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency and type of surface of
                  original finish.
                  If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in a
                  manner that provides a finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets
                  requirements of Specification, and is acceptable to Engineer.

3.7    PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATiON

            Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on
            insulation and contact surfaces.

            When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor's convenience in
            areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other adverse atmosphere until completion
            of construction, ensure adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided and
            acceptable to Engineer.


                                             END OF SECTION




BASIC ELECTRIcAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                    ONWASA
261000-6                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Prted: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                               Project No. NCONWAO6. 0006
                                              SECTION 26 10 05

                             BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   RELATED SECTIONS

      A.    Requirements specified within this section apply to all sections in Division 26, Electrical. Work
            specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections.

1.3   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                ASTM International (ASTM):
                       A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
                       Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
                       A1011/A1O11M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
                       Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy
                       Formability.
                       E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
            2.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc (IEEE): 18, Standard for Shunt
                 Power Capacitors.
           3.    Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA): RP12.06.O1, Wiring Practices
                 for Hazardous (Classified) Locations InstrumentationPart 1: Intrinsic Safety.
           4.    National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                 a 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
                      AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
                       Enclosures.
                       C12.1 Code for Electricity Metering
                       C12.6 Phase-Shifting Devices Used in Metering, Marking and Arrangement of,
                      Terminals for
                      CP 1, Shunt Capacitors.
                      ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays
                      Rated 600 Volts.
                      ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
                      KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
           5.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
           6.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
                      98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
                      248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses.
                       486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or
                       Copper Conductors.
                       489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
                       Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
                       508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
                       810, Standard for Capacitors.
                       943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.


ONWASA                                                            BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 10 05
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO6. D006
                        1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks.
                        1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

1.4     SUBMITTALS

        A.    Action Submittals:
                   Provide manufacturers' data for the following:
                       Control devices.
                       Control relays.
                       Circuit breakers.
                       Fused switches.
                       Nonfused switches.
                       Decontactors
                       Timers.
                       Fuses.
                       Magnetic contactors.
                       Intrinsic safety barriers.
                       Firestopping.
                   I.   Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having enclosures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1     MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW VOLTAGE

        A.    General:
                 Type: Molded case.
                 Trip Ratings: 15-800 amps.
                 Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac.
                  Suitable for mounting and operating in any position.
                  NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

        B.    Operating Mechanism:
                  Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle.
                  Quick-make, quick-break action.
                  Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in open position.
                  ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle.
                  Operating handle to assume a center position when tripped.

        C.    Trip Mechanism:
                   Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
                   Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to lox for frames
                   greater than 100 amps.
                   Two and three pole, common trip.
                   Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole.
                   Test button on cover.
                   Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
              7,    Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multi-pole circuit
                    breakers are shown.

        D.    Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings:
                  Equal to, or greater than, available fault current or interrupting rating shown.
                  Series Connected Ratings: Do not apply series connected short circuit ratings




BASIC ELECTRLCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                         ONWASA
261005-2                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    AP.CADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
           Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFC1): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above
           with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943,
           Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel).
                Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.
                Push-to-test button.

           Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustment which
           simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual pole continuously through a 3X to
           lox trip range.

           Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle Lock ON devices, mechanical interlocks,
           key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs as shown or otherwise required. Shunt trip
           operators shall be continuous duty rated or have coil-clearing contacts.

           Connections:
               Supply (line side) at either end.
               Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression tugs where shown.
               Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than 100 amperes.
                Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or conductor
                am pacity.
                Use bolted bus connections, except where bolt-on is not compatible with existing breaker
                provisions

           Enclosures for Independent Mounting:
               See Article Enclosures.
               Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required accessories shalt be
               UL 489 listed.
               Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover with switch in the
               ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

2.2   FUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

      A.   LJL 98 tisted for use and location of installation.

      B.   NEMAKSI.

      C.   Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 amps RMS symmetrical with Class R, Class J, or Class L fuses
           installed

      D.   Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external
           markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

      E.   Connections:
               Mechanical lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.
               Lugs removable/replaceable.
               Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

      F.   Fuse Provisions:
           1,   30-amp to 600-amp rated shall incorporate rejection feature to reject all fuses except
                Class R.
           2.   601-amp rated and greater shall accept Class L fuses, unless otherwise shown.

      G.   Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.



ONWASA                                                           BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACLLITY                                                   26 1005-3
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONW,A08. D006
        H.    Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide
              bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

              Manufacturer: Shall be the same manufacturer as the low voltage motor control centers
              specified in Section 26 60 00 - Low Voltage Motor Control.

2.3     NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE

              NEMAKS1.

              Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HO) type with external
              markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

              Lugs: Suitable for use 'with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

              Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

              Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide
              bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

              Manufacturer: Shall be the same manufacturer as the low voltage motor control centers
              specified in Section 26 60 00 - Low Voltage Motor Control.

2.4     DECONTACTORS

              Receptacles shall be 30A, 480V, 3-pole plus ground with four auxiliary outputs, NEMA 4x
              rated. Receptacles shall be Meltric no. 33-34043-974-4X or equal rated at 10 HP.

              Inlets shalL be 30A, 480V, 3-pole plus ground with four auxiliary outputs, NEMA 4x rated. Inlets
              shall be Meltric no. 33-38043-974-4X or equal rated at 10 HP.

              Handles with onion skin bushing shall be Meltric no. 61-6A013 or equal.

2.5     FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT

        A.    Power Distribution, General:
              1.  Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating.
              2   Provide to fit mountings specified with switches,
                    UL248.

        B.    Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps:
                 Class: RK-1.
                 Type: Dual element, with time delay.

        C.    Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 601 Amps to 6,000 Amps:
                 Class: L.
                 Double 0-rings and silver links.

        D.    Cable Limiters:
              1.  600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad.

        E.    Ferrule:
                   600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension.
                   Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                           ONWASA
26 10 05-4                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                               Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                       Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or non-time-delay as required.
                       Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and use.

       2.6   PUSHBUTTON, IND1CATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

                  Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600.

                  Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard.

                  Indicating Light. Push-to-test.

             0.   Pushbutton Color:
                      ON or START: Black.
                      OFF or STOP: Red.

                  Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated.

             F.   Legend Plate:
                      Material: Aluminum.
                      Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color.
                      Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces on each of two
                      lines, as required, indicating specific function.
                      Letter Height: 7/64 inch.

       2.7   TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS

                  UL 486E and UL 1059

                  Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.

                  Capable of termination of controI circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes.

                  Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact
                  with wire between compression screw and yoke.

                  Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal.

                  Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.

                  Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.

                  Terminals:
                      Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping.
                      Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.
                      Individual, rail mounted.

             1.   Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.

       2.8   MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY

             A.   Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make,
i-'-              720VA break.

I            B.   NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts).

       ONWASA                                                            BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
       NORTHWEST REGiONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiLITY'                                                   26 1005-5
       ARCADIS                                                                                      Prirted: 4.5.2011
       Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
        C.    Time Delay Relay Attachment:
              1.  Pneumatic type, timer adjustable as shown.
              2   Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa.

        0.    Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts.

2.9     TIME DELAY RELAY

        A,    Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break.

              NEMA ICS 2 Designation: 8150 (150 volts).

              Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay.

              One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum).

               Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent.

              Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.10 RESET TIMER

               Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid-operated clutch.

              Mounting: Semi flush panel.

              Contacts: 10 amps, 120 volts.

2,11    ELAPSED TIME METER

              Drive: Synchronous motor.

              Range: 0 hour to 99,999.9 hours, non-reset type.

              Mounting: Semi-flush panel.

2.12 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR

        A.    UL listed.

        B.    Electrically operated, electrically held.

        C.    Main Contacts:
                  Power driven in one direction with mechanical spring dropout.
                  Silver alloy with wiping action and arc quenchers.
                  Continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes.
                  Poles: As shown.

        D.    Control: As shown.

        E.    Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and one normally closed, rated 7200VA make, 720VA
              break, at 600V, A600 per NEMA ICS 5.

        F.    Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                           ONWASA
26 1005-6                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                               Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
    2.13 PHASE MONITOR RELAY

          A.   Features:
                    Voltage and phase monitor relay shall drop out on low voltage, voltage unbalance, loss of
                    phase, or phase reversal.
                    Contacts: Single-pole, double-throw, 10 amperes, 120/240V ac. Where additional
                    contacts are shown or required, provide magnetic control relays.
                    Adjustable trip and time delay settings.
                    Transient Protection: 1 000V ac.
                    Mounting: Multipin plug-in socket base.

    2.14 MAGNETIC LIGHTING CONTACTOR

          A.   Comply with NEMA CS 2; provide LJL 508 listing.

          B.   Electrically operated by dual-acting, single coil mechanism.

          C.   Inherently interlocked and mechanically held in both OPEN and CLOSED position.

          D.   Main Contacts:
                                               rated 30 amperes, 600 volts, withstand rating of
                   Double-break, continuous-duty,
                    22000 amps RMS symmetrical at 250 volts and 65,000 amps RMS symmetrical at
                    480 volts.
                    Marked for electric discharge lamps, tungsten, and general purpose loads.
                    Position not dependent on gravity, hooks, latches, or semi-permanent magnets.
                    Capable of operating in any position.
                    Visual indication for each contact.

          E.   Auxiliary contact relay for two-wire control.

-         F.   One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact rated 10 amperes continuous,
               7,200VA make, 720VA break with NEMA designation of A600 (600 volts).

               Fully rated neutral terminal.

               Provision for remote pilot amp with use of auxiliary contacts.

               Clamp type, self-rising terminal plates for solderless connections.

               Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

    2.15 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS

          A.   Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gauge
               minim urn.

          B.   Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:
                    Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
                    Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H 32.

          C.   Nonmetallic Framing Channel:
               1. Material: Fire retardant, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin.
               2, Channel fitting of same material as channel.
               3. Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.

    ONWASA                                                           BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
    NORTHWEST REGiONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILLTY                                                   261005-7
    ARCADIS                                                                                   Printed: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
2.16    INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIER

              Provides a safe energy level for exposed wiring          in   a Class I, Division 1 or Division 2
              hazardous area when circuit is connected to power source in non hazardous area.

              Rating: Power source shall be rated 24 volts dc, nominal, with not more than 250 volts
              available under fault conditions.

              Contact Rating: 5 amps, 250 volts ac.

        0.    Mounting: Rail or surface.

2.17 SW]TCHBOARD MATTING

              Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.

              Matting shall be installed in front of all low voltage motor control centers, low and medium
              voltage switchgear, and panelboards.

2.18 FIRESTOPS

        A.    General:
                    Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than, the assembly
                    penetrated.
                    Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and after exposure to
                    flame.
              3     Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established by testing
                    identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
                    or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.19 ENCLOSURES

              Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted using an
              electrode position process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted structural joints
              have a complete finish coat on and between them.

              Color: Manufacturer's standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless otherwise shown.

              Manufacturer: Hoffman, or approved equal

              Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of different systems and
              voltage.

              Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical enclosures according to
              the following table:

                     ENCLOSURES
                     Location                 Finish          Environment            NEMA 250 Type
                     Indoor                  Finished         Dry                    1

                     Indoor                  Unfinished       Dry                    I
                     Indoor                  Unfinished       Industrial Use         12
                     Indocrand Outdoor       Any              Wet                    4XType 316
                                                                                     Stainless Steel
                     Indoor and Outdoor      Any              Denoted "WP"           3R

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                          ONWASA
261005-8                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                         ARCAD1S
                                                                                         Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                  ENCLOSURES
                  Location                 Finish            Environment           NEMA 250 Type
                  Indoor and Outdoor       Any               Wet and Corrosive     4X Type 316
                                                                                   Stainless Steel
                  Indoor and Outdoor       Any               Wet, Dust or Oil      13 Aluminum
                  Indoor and Outdoor       Any               Hazardous Gas         7 Aluminum
                  Indoor and Outdoor       Any               Hazardous Dust        9 Aluminum

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1    GENERAL

       A.   Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2    PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH

       A.   Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry
            locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations.

            Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant type                   in
            nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas.

3.3    SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL

       A.   Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable
            tray systems.

       B.   Channel Type:
            1.  Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations:
                      Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum.
                      PVC-Coated Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel.
                      Aluminum Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Aluminum.
            2.  Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations:
                      Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum.
                      PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic.
                      PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless
                     steel, nonmetallic, or PVC-coated steel.
            3.   Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations:
                     Aluminum Raceway shall be mounted on aluminum framing channel.
                     Aluminum Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Aluminum framing channe].
            4.   Outdoor Corrosive Locations:
                     Aluminum Raceway: Aluminum.
                      PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless
                     steel.

       C.   Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:
                Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.
                Painted Channel: Rust-inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint.
                Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer.
                PVC-Coated Channe]: PVC patch.

3.4   INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS

      A.    Install in compliance with ISA RPI2.06.O1.

ONWASA                                                             BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                          261005-9
ARCAO1S                                                                                            Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0000
              Arrange conductors such that wiring from hazardous areas cannot short to wiring from
              nonhazardous area.

              Stencil INTRINSICALLY SAFE CIRCUIT on all boxes enclosing barriers.

3.5     SWITCHBOARD MATTING

        A.    Install 36-inch width in front of all low voltage switchgear, low voltage motor control centers,
              and panelboards.

              Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator controls or afford
              access to devices.

3.6     FIRESTOPS

              Install   in   strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with installation
              requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

              Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill
              openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire-
              resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs.


                                                END OF SECTION




BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                            ONWASA
261005-10                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. DOUG
                                            SECTION 26 10 06

                                   ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

PART I     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            1.   American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
            2.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
                       C57.12,00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed             Distribution,
                       Power, and Regulating Transformers.
                        242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and
                      Commercial Power Systems.
                      399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis.
                      1584, Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations.
            3.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and
                 Labels.
            4.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
                      70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                      70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
            5.   OSHA 29-CFR, Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Electrical Part 1910 Subpart
                 S.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Action Submittals: Provide five copies of study in hard cover, three-ring binders, to include:
                 Short circuit study.
                 Protective Device Coordination Study: Submit within 90 days after approval of the short
                 circuit study.
                 Arc Flash Study.
                 Arc Flash Warning Labels.

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.    Short circuit, protective device coordination studies, and the arc flash study shall be prepared
            by the manufacturer furnishing the service 480V switchgear in accordance with IEEE 242 and
            IEEE 399.

1.5   SEQUENCINGANDSCHEDULING

      A.    An initial, complete short circuit study must be submitted and reviewed before Engineer will
            approve any Shop Drawings for electrical equipment.

      8.   An initial, complete protective device coordination study must be submitted with 90 days after
           approval of initial short circuit study.



ONWASA                                                                       ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 1006 1
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NcONWAO8. 0006
              Submit revised short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies and arc flash
              labels 30 days prior to energizing the electrical equipment.

              The final short circuit, protective device coordination, and arch flash studies shall be
              completed prior to Project Substantial Completion. Revise basis of the study to include as-
              installed equipment and materials.

              Submit arch flash labels prior to Project Substantial Completion.

1.6     GENERAL

        A.    Equipment arid component titles used in the studies shall be identical to the equipment and
              component titles shown on the Drawings.

        B.    Perform studies using one of the foflowing electrical engineering software packages;
              1    SKM Power Tools for Windows.
                    ETAP.
                    EDSA.
                    Easy Power.

        C.    Perform complete fault calculations for each proposed and ultimate source combination.

        D.    Source combination may include present and future power company supply circuits, large
              motors, or generators. All future equipment shown on the Drawings shall be included as part
              of the studies to be performed.

        E.    Utilize proposed load data for the study obtained from Contract Documents.

        F.    Device coordination time-current curves for medium and low voltage distribution system(s).

        G.    Individual protective device time-current characteristics on transparencies.

1.7     SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY

        A.    General;
                  Prepare in accordance with IEEE 399.
                  Use cable impedances based on copper conductors.
                  Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars.
                  Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C.
                    Use 600-volt cable reactances based on use of typical dimensions of THHN/THWN
                    conductors.
                    Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of nominal" impedance based on tolerances
                    specified in IEEE C57.12.00.

        B.    Provide:
                   Calculation methods and assumptions.
                   Selected base per unit quantities.
                   One-line diagrams.
                    Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution
                    characteristics.
                    Impedance diagrams.
                    Zero sequence impedance diagrams.
                    Typical calculation.
                    Tabulations of calculated quantities.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS                                                                        ONWASA
26 1006-2                                                   NORTHWEST REG!ONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
               9.   Results, conclusions, and recommendations.

          C    Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed
               three-phase bolted fault at each:
                    Electric utility's supply termination point.
                    Low voltage switch gear and switchboard.
                    Low voltage motor control centers.
               4    480V Standby generators.
                    All branch circuit panelboards.
                    Other significant locations throughout the system.
                    Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram.

               Provide bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for three phase bolted
               fault short circuit study.

               Provide bolted line-to-line fault current study for areas as defined for three phase bolted fault
               short circuit study.

               The short circuit and protective device coordination studies performed shall include all modes
               of operation for the distribution system. The onsite generation system is designed to operate
               in parallel with the utility. Therefore, the manufacturer shall provide results of the short circuit
               and protective device coordination studies for each mode of operation that is outlined. The
               results and recommendations for each mode of operation shall be submitted separately for
               review and approvaL

          G.   Verify:
                    Equipment and protective devices are applied within their ratings.
                    Adequacy of switchgear and motor control centers bus bars to withstand short circuit
                    stresses.
                    Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short circuit stresses.
                    Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short circuit heating, besides normal load
                    currents.

          H.   Tabulations:
               t   General Data:
                         Short circuit reactances of rotating machines.
                         Cable and conduit material data.
                         Bus data.
                         Transformer data.
                         Circuit resistance and reactance values.
               2.  Short Circuit Data (Provide for each source combination):
T                  a.    Fault impedances.
                         X to R ratios.
                        Asymmetry factors.
                         Motor contributions.
                         Short circuit kVA.
                        Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

               Written Summary:
                    Scope of studies performed.
                    Explanation of bus and branch numbering system.
                    Prevailing conditions.
                    Selected equipment deficiencies.
                    Results of short circuit study (Provide results for each source combination).
                    Comments or suggestions.

    ONWASA                                                                         ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       26 1006-3
    ARCADIS                                                                                         Priried: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
        J.    Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics.

        K     Notify Engineer in writing of circuit protective devices improperly rated for fault conditions.

        L     Revised data for"as-installed" condition.

1.8     PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

              Prepare in accordance with IEEE 242.

              Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for distribution system,
              graphically displayed on conventional log-log curve sheets. Provide separate curve sheets for
              phase and ground fault conditions for each scenario.

              Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram that applies to specific portion of system
              associated with time-current curves on that sheet.

              Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or
              asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

        E.    ]dentify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable,
              recommended tap, time delay, instantaneous and other settings recommended.

              Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets:
                   Electric utility's relays.
                    Electric utility's fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance,
                    and damage bands.
                    Low voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and
                    damage bands.
                    Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturers tolerance
                    bands.
                    Pertinent transformer full-load currents at 100 and 600 percent.
                    Transformer magnetizing inrush currents.
                    Transformer damage curves; appropriate for system operation and location.
                    ANSI transformer withstand parameters.
                    Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
                    Ground fault protective device settings.
                    Other system load protective devices for largest branch circuit and feeder circuit breaker
                    ri each motor control center.

        G.    Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:
                  Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective device operating band
                    within the transformer's characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent of
                    IEEE C57.12.00 withstand point.
                    Secondary Line-to-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin between primary protective
                    device and associated secondary device characteristic curves.

        H.    Tabulate Recommended Protective Device Settings:
              1.    Relays:
                        Current tap.
                        Time dial.
                         Instantaneous pickup.
              2.    Circuit Breakers:
                         AdjustabJe pickup.
                         Adjustable time-current characteristic.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS                                                                        ONWASA
261006-4                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER REcLAMATIoN FACILITY
Printed: 4.6.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                      Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
                      12t In/Out.
                      Zone Interlocking.

           Written Summary:
                Scope of studies performed.
                Summary of protective device coordination methodology.
                Prevailing conditions.
                Selected equipment deficiencies.
                Results of coordination study.
                Comments or suggestions.

1.9   ARCFLASHSTUDY

      A.   Perform an arc flash hazard study after the short circuit and protective device coordination
           study has been completed.

           Perform the arc flash study in accordance with NJFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Subpart
           S, and IEEE 1584 Standards.

      C.   For each major part of the electrical power system, determine the following:
                Flash hazard protection boundary.
                Limited approach boundary.
                Restricted approach boundary.
                Prohibited approach boundary.
                Incident energy level.
                PPE hazard/risk category.
           7,   Type of PPE required.

      D.   Produce arc flash warning labels listing items C.1-7 from above. Also include the bus name
           and voltage.

      E.   Produce bus detail sheets that list the items C.1-7 from above and the following additional
           items:
                Bus name.
                Upstream protective device name, type, and seWngs.
                Bus line to line voltage.

      F.   Produce an arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additional items:
               Bus name.
               Upstream protective device name, type, settings.
               Bus line to line voltage.
               Bus bolted fault.
               Protective device bolted fault current.
               Arcing fault current.
               Protective device trip/delay time.
               Breaker opening time.
               Solidly grounded column.
               Equipment type.
               Gap.
               Arc flash boundary.
               Working distance.
               Incident energy.
               Required protective fire rated clothing type and class.


ONWASA                                                                      ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACI LITY                                                     26 10 06-5
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4,5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
              Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculations and
              highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes an abnormally high
              incident energy calculation. Propose approaches to reduce the energy levels.

              Prepare a report summarizing the arc f]ash study with conclusions and recommendations
              which may affect the integrity of the electric power distribution system. As a minimum, include
              the following in the report;
                   Equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare the study.
                   Assumptions made during the study.
                   Reduced copy of the one-line drawing.
                   Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet.
              5    Bus detail sheets.
              8.   Arc flash warning labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

              Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by coordination
              study.

              Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with the short
              circuit and protective device coordination studies.

              Notify Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications.

              Prepare arc flash warning labels on equipment as specified in this section Labels shall be
              printed in color on adhesive backed labels. An example label is shown below in Figure 1.




                                           Arc Flash and Shock Hazard
                                            Appropriate PPE Required
                                               .FIh Hrd oUCI.ry
                                    4.9-       'celkni2 FIah Hazz,rd it 18 ncflo$
                                    #2         .PJ'E LOyal
                                                 o8on undyrwear pFUS FR ah]1 and FR pants
                                    0.43       :kVShodc Had wlion coyar n ronov*d
                                          '.UipIdAp1r)h
                                    i-
                                                                    -           -

                                           Rstrlctd Approach - dana 00 VoIlai Oloves
                                            .oIiIbted Approach - Class 00 VolbaGJovaa
                                    Eu1p*NóSWG.2A
                                     IEEE 1 584 fazadS ProJect 1239A 3utry ProcadUra #A5024 -
                                     EnsyPoworFU    Plant AG.des - Data Sapumtwr S ZDO3



                                         Figure 1; Example Arc Flash Label


                                                   END OF SECTION




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS                                                                                    ONWASA
26 10 06-6                                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiLITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                              ARCADIS
                                                                                             Project No. NCONWAOS. D006
                                             SECTION 26 10 10

                       GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division I Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            1    Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National Electrical Safety
                 Code (NESC).
            2.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC).

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:
           1.   Shop Drawings: Product data for the following:
                    Exothermic weld connectors.
                    Mechanical connectors.
                    Compression connectors

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
               Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where
                 required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
                 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to
                 provide a basis for approval under NEC.
                 Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
                 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
                 applied LJL listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   GROUND ROD

      A,   Material: Copper; Diameter: Minimum 1/2 inch; Length: 20 feet.

2.2   GROUND CONDUCTORS

      A.   As specified in Section 26 20 00 - Conductors.

2.3   CONNECTORS

      A.   Exothermic Weld Type:
               Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial.
               Indoor Weld: Utilize ow-smoke, low-emission process.


ONWASA                                                   GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   26 10 10 1
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOB. 0006
        B.    Compression Type:
                 Compress-deforming type: wrought copper extrusion material.
                 Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
              3  Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and larger.
              4  Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and anti-seizing compound and sealed.

        C     Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.

2.4     GROUNDING WELLS

        A.    Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked GROUND ROD

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

              Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

              Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding
              electrodes.

              Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building
              structural steel member or separate grounding electrode.

              Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent-carrying
              metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and
              cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems.

              Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in accordance with
              recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.

              Shielded Instrumentation Cables:
                   Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.
                     Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink
                     tube.
              3      Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.

3.2     WIRE CONNECTIONS

        A.    Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above
              50 volts.

        B,    Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding conductor connected
              at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

        C.    Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.

        D.    Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground
              bus.

        E.    Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.

        F.    Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.


GROUDNING AND BONDiNG FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                      ONWASA
26 0 10-2                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
           Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic
           enclosures.

           Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with grounding
           clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws.

3.3   MOTOR GROUNDING

           Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway;
           connect to motor frame.

           Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor
           connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

           Motors Less Than 10 hp: Furnish compression, spade-type terminal connected to conduit box
           mounting screw.

           Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-
           hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and
           washer.

      E.   Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install solderless terminal
           with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.4   GROUND RODS

           Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.

           Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.

           Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.

3.5   GROUNDING WELLS

           Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas.

           Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.
           1.   Place 12 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well.

3.6   CONNECTIONS

      A.   General:
                Above grade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanicar, or compression-type
                connectors; or brazing.
                Below grade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type connectors.
                Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to allow good metal-
                to-metal contact.
                Notify Engineer prior to backfihling ground connections.

      B.   Exothermic Weld Type:
               Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface.
               Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
               Avoid using badly worn molds.
               Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds.

ONWASA                                                   GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                 2610 10-3
ARCADIS                                                                                   Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAC8. D006
              5.    After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and thoroughly clean joint.

        C.    Compression Type:
                 Install in accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations.
                 Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground rods specified.
                 Install using connector manufacturers compression tool having proper sized dies.

        D.    Mechanical Type:                                                                                 L.


                    Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before
                    making connection.
                    Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations.
                    Do not conceal mechanical connections.

37      METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING

              Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to grounding system.

              Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.

              Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations,
              receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying circuits to these devices.

3.8     MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING

        A.    Install one ground rod inside each.

        B     Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 to 6 inches above floor.

        C.    Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.

              Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway grounding bushings to
              ground rod with No. 6 AWG copper conductor.

3.9     TRANSFORMER GROUNDING

        A.    Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and to any additional
              indicated grounding electrodes.
                    Bond neutrals of substation transformers to substation grounding grid and system
                    grounding network.
                    Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to four locally driven ground rods and buried
                    ground wire encircling transformer and system ground network.

3.10 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

        A.    Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.


                                              END OF SECTION




GROUDN1NG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                     ONWASA
261010-4                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4,5,2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                               Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                            SECTION 26 10 15

                                 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            1.   ASTM International (ASTM)
                      0665, Standard Test Method for Rust-Preventing Characteristics of Inhibited Mineral
                      Oil in the Presence of Water.
                      0877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids
                      Using Disk Electrodes.
                      D923, Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids.
                      0924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power Factor) and Relative
                      Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids.
                      0971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the Ring
                      Method.
                      0974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration.
                       01298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or
                       API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer
                       Method.
                       D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color
                       Scale).
                       D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating
                       Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.
                       01533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl
                       Fischer Titration.
                       D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils of
                       Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.
                 I.    02285, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating Oils of
                       Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop-Weight Method.
            2.   Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
                       5-93-639, Shielded Power Cables 5000V-4600V.
                       S-94-649, Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV.
                       S-97-682, Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV.
            3.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
                       43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
                       81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface
                       Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1): Normal Measurements.
                       400, Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage Tests on Power Cable Systems En the
                       Field
                       450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented
                       Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.
                       C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
                       C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
                       Switchgear.


ONWASA                                                             COMMISSION NO OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    261015-1
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
                          037.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear.
                          037.20.3, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
                          062.33, Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-Protective Devices.
              4.    I nternationa I Electrical Testing Association (N ETA): Acceptance Testing Specifications
                    for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (ATS).
              5.    Nationa] Electrical Ma nufacturers Association (NEMA):
                          AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit
                          Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications.
                          PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
              6.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
                          70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                          70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
                          101, Life Safety Code.
              7.    National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).
              8.    Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29, Part 1910,
                    Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1,3     SUBMITTALS

        A.    Informational Submittats:
              1.   Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:
                        Schedule for performing inspection and tests.
                        List of references to be used for each test.
                        Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).
                        Sample copy of individual device test form.
                        Sample copy of individual system test form.
              2.    Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within
                    30 days after completion of test:
              3.    Operation and Maintenance Data:
                         In accordance with Section 01 70 00 - Contract Closeout.
                        After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and
                         returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1,4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.    Testing Firm Qualifications:
                   Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing
                   authority.
                    Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical
                    equipment and systems being tested.
                    Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of
                    electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
                    Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or
                    NETA and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects.
              5,    Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.
                    Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one
                    non-certified assistant or apprentice.
                    Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining
                    services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and
                    opinions.
                    In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910,7 criteria for accreditation of testing
                    laboratories




COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                               ONWASA
261015-2                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
           Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements
           established by NETA ATS.

           Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.

1.5   SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

           Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment here in listed has been installed.

           Perform tests with apparatus deenergized whenever feasible.

           inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:
                Scheduled with Engineer prior to deenergization.
                Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment.

           Notify Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   GENERAL

      A.   Tests specified in this section shall be performed in accordance with requirements of Section
           01 65 00, Equipment Testing and Facility Start-up.

      B.   Tests and inspections shall establish:
                Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturers tolerances and
                standards.
                Installation operates properly.
           3    Equipment is suitable for energization.
           4    Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E,
                NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.

      C.   Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETAATS, industry standards, and
           manufacturer's recommendations.

      0.   Set, test, and calibrate protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, power monitoring meters, and
           other applicable devices in accordance with values established by the short circuit
           coordination and harmonics studies as specified in Section 26 01 05, Electrical Systems
           Analysis.

           Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement

           Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating
           conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.

           Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals.

           Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct out of level equipment.

      1.   Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.




ONWASA                                                              COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     261015-3
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
              Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque
              wrench/screw driver to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA
              ATS.

              Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.

              Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

              Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

              Investigate and repair or replace:
                  Electrical items that fail tests.
                  Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
                   Damaged electrical equipment.

        0.    Electrical Enclosures:
                   Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.
                   Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
                   Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
                     Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer door and panel sections having dented
                     surfaces.
                     Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and panel sections.
                     Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.
                     Replace missing or damaged hardware.
              8      Finish:
                          Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.
                          If required due to extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, refinish entire
                          assembly.

        P.    Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the
              Contract Documents or approved Submittals.

3.2     CHECKOUT AND STARTUP

        A.    Voltage Field Test:
                     Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to project when
                     installation is essentially complete and is in operation.
                     Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded
                     conditions.
                     Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on same graph) for 24 hours
                     during normal working day
                     a.   Submit Voltage Field Test Report within 5 days of test.
                     Unbalance Corrections:
                     a.   Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined
                          by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from
                          loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal.
                     b,   Obtain a written certification from a responsible power company official that voltage
                          variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not
                          made.

        B.    Equipment Line Current Tests:
                  Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment.
                     Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply
                     voltage magnitude or balance.


COMMISSIONiNG OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                                 ONWASA
26 10 15-4                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NcoNwAoB. DUOS
                  3.    If any phase current for any piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current,
                        prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and
                        corrective action taken

     3.3    SW1TCHGEAR AND SWiTCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES

            A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                      Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces.
                      Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
                      Proper operation of indicating devices.
                      Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.
                      Proper operation of drawout elements.
                      Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.
fl               7.   Check door and device interlocking system by:
                           Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position.
                           Opening attempt of door when device is ri ON or CLOSED position.
                 8.    Check nameplates for proper identification of:
                           Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.
                           Pushbutton.
                           Control switch.
                 9.   Verify that fuse and circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those specified.
                  10. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter
                      and thermographic survey applied to bolted joints.
                           Ohmic value to be zero.
                           Thermographic survey temperature gradient of 2 degrees C, or less.
                 11. Check operation and sequencing of electrical arid mechanical interlock systems by:
                           Closure attempt for locked open devices.
                           Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
                     C.    Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions.
                 12 Verify performance of each control device and feature.
                 13. ControiWiring:
                           Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary
                          diagrams.
                           Proper conductor lacing and bundling.
                           Proper conductor identification.
                           Proper conductor lugs and connections.
                 14. Exercise active components.
                 15. Perform phasing check on double-ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing from
                     each source.
                 16. Verify that all circuits, selector switches, and indicating lights are labeled as specified and
                     as shown.

            B.   Electrical Tests:
                      Insulation Resistance Tests:
                           Applied megohmmeterdcvoltage in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.1.
                           Each phase of each bus section.
                           Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
                           With switches and breakers open.
                           With switches and breakers closed.
                           Control wiring except that connected to solid-state components.
                            Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
                           manufacturer.
                 2.    Overpotential Tests:
                       a.   Applied acordc voltage and test procedure in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1,
                            C37.20.3 and NEMA PB 2.

     ONWASA                                                               COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       26 1015-5
     ARCADIS                                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
     Project No. NCONWAO8. DOUG
                         Each phase of each bus section.
                         Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
                        Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis.
              3.    Current Injection Tests:
                         For entire current circuit in each section.
                        Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere.
                        Test current at each device.
              4.    Control Wiring:
                        Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits.
                        Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal.
              5.    Operational Test:
                         Initiate control devices.
                        Check proper operation of control system in each section.

3.4     PANELBOARDS

        A.    Visua] and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:
                    Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with
                    requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.
                    Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable
                    devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
                    Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.
                    Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to
                    manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
                    Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices.
                    Verify that all panelboards are provided with a typed panel directory to clearly identify alt
                    loads that are fed from each breaker.

        B.    Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's
              instruction:
              1.    Insulation Resistance Tests:
                         Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table. 100.1.
                         Each phase of each bus section.
                         Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
                         With breakers open.
                         With breakers closed.
                         Control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
                         Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
                        manufacturer.
              2.    Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

3.5     DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

        A.    Vtsual and Mechanical Inspection:
                  Physical and insulator damage.
                  Proper winding connections.
                  Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified
                  by manufacturer.
                  Defective wiring.
                  Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
                  Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
                  Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
                  Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.



COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                                ONWASA
261015-6                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMAT ION FACILITY
Printed: 4,5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                 Verify that tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal
                 operating conditions.
                 Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization
                 and prior to toad ing.
                 Verify that the equipment includes the appropriate labels to clearly identify the equipment.

           Electrical Tests:
                Insulation Resistance Tests:
                 a.   Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.5 for
                      each:
                           Winding-to-winding.
                           Winding-to-ground.
                 b.   10-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and
                      10 minutes
                 c.   Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.14.
                 d.  Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic
                     values established by manufacturer
                 e.  Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.
           2.    Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by
                 manufacturer.

3.6   LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM

      A.   Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 and larger for:
                Physical damage.
                Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.
               Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius
               where applicable.
           5   Color coding conformance with Specifications.
           6.   Proper circuit identification.
           7.  Mechanical Connections For:
                     Proper lug type for conductor material.
                     Proper lug installation.
                      Bolt torque level in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise
                      specified by manufacturer.
           8.    Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
                      Proper shield grounding.
                      Proper terminations.
                      Proper circuit identification.
           9.    Control Cables For:
                      Proper termination.
                      Proper circuit identification.
           10.   Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are
                 terminated for correct operation of protective devices.

      B.   Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 4 and Larger:
           1.   Insulation Resistance Tests:
                      Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors.
                      Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute.
                      Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.
                      Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
           2.   Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.



ONWASA                                                               COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     261015-7
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOS. 0006
       C.    Low voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm.

3.7    SAFETY SWITCI-tES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM

       A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
             1   Proper blade pressure and alignment.
             2.  Proper operation of switch operating handle.
             3   Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.
             4,  Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.
                 Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
                 Proper phase barrier material and installation.
                 Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved Submittals.
                   Perform mechanical operational test and verify and mechanical interlocking system
                   operation and sequencing.
                   Verify that all safety switchers include the unique equipment tag number and name that
                   the switch is intended for.

       B.    Electrical Tests:
             1    Insulation Resistance Tests:
                        Applied megohm meter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
                        Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole.
                        Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
                       man ufacturer.
             2.    Contact Resistance Tests:
                       Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder.
                       Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches.

3.8    MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE C1RCUIT BREAKERS

       A.    General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated loOamperes and larger and to
             motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger.

        B.   \Jisual and Mechanical Inspection:
                  Proper mounting.
                  Proper conductor size.
                  Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
                  Cracked casings.
                  Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.12.
                  Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.
                  Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.
                  Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors.

       C.    Electrical Tests:
             1.   Insulation Resistance Tests:
                        Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers and
                        500-voJt dc megohrn meter for 240-volt circuit breakers.
                        Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.
                        Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.
                       Testva[uestocomplywith NETAATS, Table 1001.
             2.    Contact Resistance Tests:
                       Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
                        Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar
                       breakers.
             3.    Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:


coMMISsIoNING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                              ONWASA
261015-8                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.52011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                      Long-time minimum pickup arid delay.
                      Short-time pickup and delay.
                      Ground fault pickup and delay.
                      Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
                      Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's
                      published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
                      Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. Alternatively,
                      use NETA ATS Table 100.7.
                 9.   Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4,
                      Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS Table 100.8.

3.9    LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

       A.   Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                Proper mounting, cell fit, and element alignment.
                Proper operation of racking interlocks.
                Check for damaged arc chutes.
                Proper contact condition.
                Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
                 Perform mechanical operational and contact alignment tests in accordance with
                 manufacturer's instructions.
                 Check operation of closing and tripping functions of trip devices by activating ground fault
                 relays, undervoltage shunt relays, and other auxiliary protective devices.
                 Verify primary and secondary contact wipe, gap setting, and other dimensions vital to
                 breaker operation are correct.
                 Check charging motor, motor brushes, associated mechanism, and limit switches for
                 proper operation and condition.
                 Check operation of electrically operated breakers in accordance with manufacturer's
                 instructions.
                 Check for adequate lubrication on contact, moving, and sliding surfaces.

       B.   Electrical Tests:
                 Insulation Resistance Tests:
                       Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers.
                       Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.
                       Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.
                      Testvaluestocomplywith NETAATS, Table 100.1.
            2.   Contact Resistance Tests:
                     Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
                      Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar
                     breakers.
            3.   Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
                     Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
                     Short-time pickup and delay.
                     Ground fault pickup and delay.
                     Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
                      Trip characteristic when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall be within
                      manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band.

3.10 MEDIUM VOLTAGE VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

      A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                Check for proper element alignment.
                Check for proper operation of cubicle shutters and racking mechanism.
                Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

ONWASA                                                              COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACIIJTY                                                     261015-9
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. DOGS
              4.    Perform mechanical operational tests on breaker and it's operating mechanism in
                    accordance with manufacturers instructions, plus check
                         Pull rod adjustment.
                         Trip latch clearance.
                         Overtravel stops.
                         Wipe and gap setting.
              5.    Perform breaker travel and velocity analysis in accordance with manufacturer's
                    instructions; values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable limits.
              6.    Check contact erosion indicators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
              7.    With breaker in TEST position:
                         Trip and close breaker with control switch.
                         Trip breaker by manually operating each protective relay.

        B.    Electrical Tests:
              1.   Insulation Resistance Tests:
                         Utilize 2,500-volt dc megohmmeter for 5-kVandl5-kV circuit breakers.
                         Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.
                         Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.
                        Testvaluesto comply with NETAATS, Table 100.1.
              2.    Contact Resistance Tests:
                        Between the line and load stab of closed contact resistance in microhms across
                        each pole.
                        Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar
                        breakers.
              3.    Overpotential Tests:
                        Maximum applied ac or dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.19.
                        Each pole-to-ground with other poles grounded and contacts closed for 1 minute.
                        Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
              4.    Minimum pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils.
              5.    Control Wiring Tests:
                        Insulation resistance test at 1,000-volts dc on control wiring, except that connected
                        to solid state components.
                        Insulation resistance to be I megohm minimum.
              6.    Vacuum bottle overpotential integrity test across each vacuum bottle with breaker in
                    OPEN position, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
              7.    Power Factor Test (Each Phase):
                       With breaker in both OPEN and CLOSED position.
                       Compare power factor and arc chute watt loss with adjacent poles or manufacturer's
                       published data.
              8.    Power Factor Test (Each Bushing):
                       Utilize conductive straps and hot collar procedures if bushings are not equipped with
                       power factor tap.
                       Power factor and capacitance test results within nameplate rating of bushings.

3.11    INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

        A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
              1.  Visual]y check current, potential, and control transformers for:
                        Cracked insulation.
                        Broken leads or defective wiring.
                        Proper connections.
                       Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
              2.  Verify mechanically:
                       Grounding and shorting connections have good contact.
                       Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly.

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                                ONWASA
261015-10                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONJWAO8. D006
           3.   Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers.

           Electrical Tests:
           1.   Current Transformer Tests:
                     Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring-to-ground at 1,000 volts dc for
                    30 seconds.
                    Polarity test.
           2.   Potential Transformer Tests:
                a.  Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA ATS,
                    Table 100.9 for 1 minute on:
                          Winding-to-winding.
                          Winding-to-ground.
                b.  Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable.
           3.   Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that
                shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

3.12 METERING

      A.   Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
               Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.
               Verify meter multipliers.
               Verify meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
               Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
               Check calibration of electrical transducers.

3.13 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

      A.   Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, panelboard, and switchgear
                assemblies for proper connection and tightness.
                Ground bus connections in motor control center, panelboard, and switchgear assemblies
                for proper termination and tightness.
                Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
                Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.
                Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully fiLled
                and proper bonding was obtained.

      B.   Electrical Tests:
           1.   Fall-of-Potential Test:
                     In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground
                    system's resistance.
                    Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 3ohm(s).
           2.   Two-Point Direct Method Test:
                    In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance
                     between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived
                     neutral points.
                     Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by
                     0.50 ohm.

3.14 AC INDUCTION MOTORS

     A.    General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 hp and larger.

     B,    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


ONWASA                                                             COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   26 10 15 11
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No NCONWAOS. DOOS
              1     Proper electrical and grounding connections.
              2.    Shaft alignment.
              3.    Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
              4.    Operate motor and check for:
                         Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
                        Overheating.
                        Correct rotation.
                         Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent
                        protectors for functionality and proper operation.
                        Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS Table 100.10.
              5.    Check operation of space heaters.

        C.    Electrical Tests:
              1.   Insulation Resistance Tests:
                         In accordance with iEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETAATS, Table 100.1
                         for:
                         1)      Motors 200 hp and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30
                                and 60 seconds.
                         Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
                         manufacturers.
              2.    Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's
                    instructions.
              3.    Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and
                    nameplate full-load amperes.

3.15 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL

        A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
              1    Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
              2.   Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.
              3.   Proper overload protection for each motor.
              4.   Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.
              5.   Proper operation of drawout elements.
              6.   Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system
              7.  Check door and device interlocking system by:
                        Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position.
                        Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position.
              8.  Check key interlocking systems for:
                        Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position.
                        Key removal when device is in OFF or OPEN position.
                        Closure attempt of device when key has been removed.
                        Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders.
                        Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders; destroy duplicate sets of
                         keys.
              9.  Check nameplates for proper identification of:
                       Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.
                       Pushbuttons.
                       Control switches.
              10. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents.
              11. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents.
              12. Check bus connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and
                  thermographic survey:
                       Ohmic value to be zero.
                       Thermographic survey temperature gradient of 2 degrees C, or less per NETA ATS
                       Table 100.18

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                                ONWASA
261015-12                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                13. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
                         Closure attempt for locked open devices.
                         Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
                         Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions.
                14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control
                      center.
                15.   Control Wiring:
                      a Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with eTementary
                        diagrams.
                        Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.
                        Check for proper conductor identification.
                        Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.
                16. Exercise active components.
                17. Inspect contactors for:
                        Correct mechanical operations.
                        Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.
                        Correct torque of all connections.
                18. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size.
                19. Compare motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size.
                20.   Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus
                      phasing from each source.
                21. Verify that all circuits are properly labeled as specified. Additionally, all lights, selector
                      switches, elapsed time meters, and other components installed on the front face of the
                      various motor control centers shall include a label as specified.

           B.   Electrical Tests:
                1.   Insulation Resistance Tests:
                          Applied megohmmeterdc voltage in accordance with NETAATS, Table 100.1.
                          Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase.
                          Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase.
                          Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter
                          contacts closed and protective devices open.
                          Testvaluestocomplywith NETAATS, Table 100.1.
                2.    Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and
                      Monitor Trip Time:
                          Trip time in accordance with manufacturers published data.
                          Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.
                3,    Control Wiring Tests:
fl                    a.  Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits.
                      b.  Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal,
                          Insulation resistance test at 1000 volts do on control wiring except that connected to
                          solid state components: Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum.
                4.    Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.

     3.16 BATTERY SYSTEM

          A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                    Physical damage and electrolyte leakage.
                    Evidence of corrosion.
                    Intercell bus link integrity.
                    Battery cable insulation damage and contaminated surfaces.
                    Operating conditions of ventilating equipment.
                    Visual check of electrolyte level.

           B.   Electrical Tests:

     ONWASA                                                              COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    261015-13
     ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
     Project No. NCONWAOB. 0006
               1.   Measure:
                         Bank charging voltage.
                         Individual cell voltage.
                         Electrolyte specific gravity in each cell.
                         Measured test values to be in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
              2.    Verify during recharge mode:
                         Charging rates from charger.
                         Individual cell acceptance of charge.
              3.    Load tests for integrity and capacity; test values in accordance with IEEE 450.

3.17 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS

        A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
                  Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.
                  Ground connections to ground bus.

        B.     Electrical Tests:
               1.   Varistor Type Arrestors:
                          Clamping voltage test.
                          Rated RMS voltage test.
                    c,    Rated dc voltage test.
                    d.    Varistor arrestor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 4.9.

3.18 STANDBY AND EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEMS

        A.    Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
              1.   Proper grounding.
              2.   Blockage of ventilating passageways.
              3.   Proper operation of jack water heaters.
              4.   Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems.
              5.   Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
              6.   Overheating of engine or generator.
              7.   Proper installation of vibration isolators.
              8.   Proper cooling liquid type and level.
              9.   Operate engine-generator and check for:
                         Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
                         Overheating.
                         Correct rotation.
                         Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent thermal protectors for
                         function ability and proper operation.
                         Excessive vibration.
              10. Verify voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed and output voltage
                   to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length of time.
              11. Proper operation of meters and instruments.
              12. Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line diagram or approved
                   Submittal.
              13.   Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives energized and
                    operating under normal load conditions.

        B.    Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
              1.   Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load consisting of connected
                   building load to verify:
                         Transfer switch operation.
                         Automatic starting operation.


COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                               ONWASA
261015-14                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5,2011                                                                                 ARCAIJIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                     Operating ability of engine-generator.
                     Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush Currents.
           2.   Phase rotation tests.
           3.   Test engine protective shutdown features for:
                     Low oil pressure.
                     Overtemperature
                     Overspeed.
           4.   Vibration base-line test on generator sets rated above 300 kW; levels in accordance with
                manufacturer's recommendations.
           5.   Load bank test with reactors and resistors adjusted to 80 percent power factor for each
                load step. Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil pressure, and engine coolant
                temperature at 15-minute intervals:
                    25 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
                    50 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
                    75 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
                    100 percent applied load for 3 hours.
                    Load test results to demonstrate ability of unit to deliver rated load for test period.
           6.   One-Step Rated kW Load Pickup Test:
                    Perform test immediately after performing load bank test.
                    Apply rated load, minus largest rated hp motor, to generator.
                     Start largest rated hp motor and record voltage drop for 20 cycles minimum with
                     high-speed chart recorder or digital storage oscilloscope.
                     Compare voltage drop with maximum allowable voltage dip for specified starting
                     situation.

3.19 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY

      A.   Provide a thermographic survey per NETA ATS Table 100.18 of connections associated with
           incoming service conductors, bus work, and branch feeder conductors No. 4 and larger at
           each:
                Low voltage switchgear.
                Low voltage motor control center.
                    Panelboard.
                    Engine generator

           Provide a therrnographic survey of feeder conductors No. 4 and larger terminating at:
                Low voltage disconnect switches.
               Transfer switches.

      C.   Engine generators.
           1.   Provide a thermographic survey of all motor feeders that originate in motor control
                centers, stand alone variable frequency drives, or vendor supplied package panels. The
                thermographic survey shall be performed at both ends of the motor feeder (i.e. at the
                motor control centerNFD!vendor package panel and at the motor.)

      0.   Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performing survey.

           Perform with equipment energi2ed during periods of maximum possible loading per
           NFPA 70B, Section 20i7.

           Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 40 percent of rated load. If plant
           load is insufficient, perform test with supplemental load bank producing rated load on item
           being measured.



ONWASA                                                               COMMISSIONLNG OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      26 10 15 15
ARCADIS                                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No, NCONWAO8. D006
        G.    Utilize thermographic equipment capable of:
                    Detectrng emitted radiation.
                    Converting detected radiation to visual signal.
                    Detecting I degree C temperature difference between subject area and reference point of
                    30 degrees C.

        H.    Temperature Gradients:
                 3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrants investigation.
                 7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be corrected as time permits.
                 16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be corrected immediately.

              Provide written report of:
                  Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients.
                   Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or greater.
                  Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct the cause of heat rise.
                  Detected phase unbalance.
                   Provide thermal scan photographs with any reports and/or submittals to outline areas of
                  concern.


                                             END OF SECTION




COMMSSION1NG OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS                                                                 ONJWASA
261015-16                                               NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCALDIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                             SECTION 26 20 00

                                               CONDUCTORS

PART 1      GENERAL

ti     RELATED DOCUMENTS

       A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
             Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
             Section

1.2    REFERENCES

       A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                 ASTM International (ASTM):
                        A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
                       Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
                       B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
                       B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
                       Medium-Hard, or Soft.
                       B263, Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional Area of Stranded
                       Conductors.
             2.   Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), Telecommunications Industry Association (T1A): TIA-
                  568-B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
             3.   Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA):
                       S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.
                       S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables.
                       T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with Theoretical Heat Input
                       of 210,000 Btu/hour.
            4.    National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (N EMA):
                       CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations.
                       WC 55, Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire.
                       WC 70, Standard for Non-shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the
                       Distribution of Electrical Energy.
            5.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
                  a.   70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                  b     262, Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
                      Air-Handling Spaces
            6.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
                      13, Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables
                      44, Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
                      62, Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire.
                      486A-4863, Wire Connectors.
                      4860, Standard for Splicing Wire Connections.
                        510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating
                        Tape.
                        854, Standard for Safety Service-Entrance Cables.
                  ft    1072, Standard for Safety Medium-Voltage Power Cables.
                        1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional
                        Optical-Fiber Members.
                        1569, Metal Clad Cables.




ONWASA                                                                                        CONDUCTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    262000 1
ARCAD1S                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                    k.   1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and
                         Flexible Cords.

13      SUBMITTALS

        A.    Action Subrnittals:
              1    Wire and cable descriptive product information.
                   Wire and cable accessories descriptive product information.
                   Manufactured wiring systems descriptive product information.
                   Cable Pulling Calculations:
                        Calculations shall be submitted and reviewed before cable installation.
                        Provide cable pulling calculations for the following cable installations:
                              Multiconductor 600-volt cable sizes larger than #2 AWG that cannot be hand
                              pulled.
                              Power and control conductor,        and control and       instrumentation   cable
                              installations in ductbanks.
                              Feeder circuits, single conductors #4/0 and larger.

         B.    Informational Submittals:
                    Journeyman Lineman splicing credentials.
                    Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.    Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
              1   Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the AHJ, material and
                  equipment shalt be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
                  organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC
              2.    Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
                    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
                    applied LJL listing mark.

        B.    Terminations and Splices for Conductors above 600 Volts: Work shall be done by Journeyman
              Lineman with splicing credentials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1     CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

        A.    Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

        B,    Conductor Type:
                  120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
                  120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
                  All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.

        C.    Insulation: Type THHNITHWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with XHHW-2 insulation.

        D.    Direct Burial and Aerial Conductors and Cables:
                  Type USE/RH H/RHW insulation, UL 854 listed, or Type RHW-2/USE-2.
                   Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70.




CONDUCTORS                                                                                          ONWASA
26 2000-2                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAI. WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. N0ONWAOB. D006
            E.   Flexible Cords and Cables:
                 1    Type SOW-A150 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL 62.
                 2.   Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70.

     2.2    600-VOLT RATED CABLE

            A.   General:
                      Type TO, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at
                      70000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of
                      NFPA 70, Article 725.
                      Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for
                      which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.
                      Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.
                      Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations.
                      Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight and oil resistant.

            B.   Type 1 Multiconductor Control Cable:
                 1.  Conductors:
                     a.  No. 14 AWG, seven-strand coppei
                     b   Insulation: 15-mu PVC with 4-mil nylon.
                         UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VVV-1.
                         Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape.
                     e   Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2.
r.               2   Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test.
                     a.  Cable Sizes:
                                                      Max. Outside
                                                      Diameter                   Jacket Thickness
                             No. of Conductors        (Inches)                   (Mils)
                             3                        0.41                      45
                             5                        0.48                      45
                             7                        0.52                      45
                              12                      0.72                      60
                             19                       0.83                      60
                             25                       1.00                      60
                             37                       1.15                      80

           C.    Type 3, No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for
                 noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55
                 requirements.
                 t    Outer Jacket: 45-mu nominal thickness.
                      Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to
                      provide 100 percent coverage.
                      Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.
                      Conductors:
                           Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements
                           of ASTM B8.
                           20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.
                           Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
                           Jacket: 4-mu nominal nylon.
                           Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red.




     ONWASA                                                                                     CONDUCTORS
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                 2620 00 3
     ARCAD!S                                                                                   Printed: 4.5.20l
     Project No, NCONWAOS. D006
        D.    Type 4, No.16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed
              for noise rejection  for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting
              NEMAWC 55 requirements.
                 Outer Jacket: 45-mu nominal.
                 Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mit, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to
                 provide 100 percent coverage.
                 Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD.
                 Conductors:
                      Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements
                      of ASTM B8.
                      20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire.
                      Insulation: 15-mu nominal PVC.
                      Jacket: 4-mit nylon.
                      Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue.

        E.    Type 5,  No. 18 AWG, Multi-Twisted, Shielded Pairs with a Common, Overall Shield
              Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer
              cable, meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements.
               1.   Conductors:
                         Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in accordance with
                         ASTM B8.
                         Tinned copper drain wires.
                         Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18.
                         Insulation: 15-mit PVC.
                         Jacket: 4-mu nylon.
                        Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor numerically printed
                        for group identification.
                         Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mu, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer.
              2.    Cable Shield: 2.35-mu, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped for
                    100 percent coverage.
              3.    Cable Sizes:
                                                      Maximum Outside            Nominal Jacket
                                                      Diameter                   Thickness
                            Number of Pairs           (Inches)                   (Mils)
                            4                         0.50                       45
                            8                         0.68                       60
                            12                        0.82                       60
                            16                        0.95                       80
                            24                        1.16                       80
                            36                        1.33                       80
                            50                        1.56                       80

        F.    Type 8, Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable:
              1.  Conductors:
                  a.   Class B, stranded coated copper.
                  ft Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW-2.
                  c.   Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.
              2.    Sheath:
                        UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C.
                        Continuous shield Al/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper braid.
              3.    Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569.
              4.    Cable Sizes:




CONDUCTORS                                                                                           ONWASA
262000-4                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                         Minimum                        Max.
                                         Ground Wire       No. of       Outside      Jacket
                       Conductor         Size              Insulated    Diameter     Thickness
                       Size              (AWG)             Conductors   (lnches)     (Mils)
                       I2AWG             12                4            0.610        50
                       1OAWG             10                4            0.670        50
                       8AWG              8                 4            0.910        50
                       6AWG              6                 4            1.010        50
                       4AWG              4                 4            1.150        50
                       2AWG              2                 4            1.310        50

      G.   Type 9, Multiconductor Metal-Clad (UL Type MC) Power Cable for Adjustable Frequency
           Drive Applications (Only to be used for motors larger than 100 horsepower):
           1.   Meeting requirements of UL 44 and UL 1569.
           2.   Conductors:
                    Class B, stranded coated copper.
                    Insulation: 600-volt cross-]inked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW or EPR.
                    Grounding Conductors: Bare, stranded copper. Provide three symmetrical grounding
                    conductors.
           3.   Sheath:
                    UL listed Type MC.
                     Continuous welded, corrugated aluminum sheath.
                     Suitable for use as grounding conductor.
           4.   Outer Jacket: PVC per UL 1569.
           5.   Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test.
           6.   Cable Sizes:
                                        Minimum                       Max.
                                        Ground Wire No. of            Outside        Jacket
                       Conductor        Size           Insulated      Diameter       Thickness
                       Size             (AWG)          Conductors     (Inches)        (Mils)
                       12AWG          3x16             3                0.79        50
                                                       4                0.85
                       1OAWG          3x14             3                0.82        50
                                                       4                0.90
                       8AWG           3x14             3                0.85        50
                                                       4                1.00
                       6 AWG          3x12             3                0.99        50
                                                       4                1.10
                       4AWG           3x12             3                1.08        50
                                                       4                1.20
                       2AWG           3x10             3                1.24        50
                                                       4                1.45
                       1AWG           3x10             3                1.40        50
                                                       4                1.55
                       1/0 KCM        3x10             3                1.52        50
                                                       4                1.60
                       2/0 AWG        3x8              3                1.67        50
                                                       4                1.75
                       4/0 AWG        3x8              3                1.93        60
                                                       4                2.10
                       250 KCM        3x8              3                2.11        60
                                                       4                2.20




ONWASA                                                                                    CONDUCTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                262000-5
ARCADIS                                                                                  Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                          Minimum                          Max.
                                          Ground Wire     No. of           Outside        Jacket
                          Conductor       Size            Insulated        Diameter       Thickness
                          Size            (AWG)           Conductors       (Inches)       (Mils)
                          350 KCM         3x8             3                2.39           60
                                                          4                250
                          500 KCM         3x8             3                2.80           75
                                                          4                2.90

2.3     300-VOLT RATED CABLE

        A.    General:
                 Type PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13 and NFPA 70, Article 725.
                  Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for
                 which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.
                  Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.
                  Minimum Temperature Rating: 105 degrees C.
                  Passes Vertical Tray Flame Test.
                  Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

        B.    Type 24, Twisted Pair Fire Alarm Cable Shielded: Power limited fire protective signaling circuit
              cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 760.
              1.   Cable: Pass NFPA 262, 70000 Btu flame test and listed by State Fire Marshall.
              2.   Outer Jacket: Red in color, identified along its entire length as fire protective signaling
                   circuit cable.
              3.   Conductors:
                        Solid, tinned, or bare copper shielded with stranded, tinned copper drain wire.
                        Insulation: 15-mil PVC
                        Group Shield: Aluminum/Mylar spiral wound along entire length.
              4.   Cable Sizes:
                                                      Maximum Outside             Nominal Jacket
                                                      Diameter                   Thickness
                            Wire Size                 (Inches)                  Jlnches)
                            12                        0.36                       0.042
                            14                        0.32                       0.042
                            16                        0.26                       0.037
                            18                        0.23                       0.037

2.4     SPECIAL CABLES

        A.    Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:
                   Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIAIEIA      568-B.2-1
                   Category 6 requirements.
                   Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit Ethernet and video. Cable
                   shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products and shall be backward
                   compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e.
                   Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with FEP insulation and
                   blue PVC jacket.
                   NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated, comply with flammability plenum requirements of
                   NFPA 70 and NFPA 262.
                   Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperature of minus
                   20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking.




CONDUCTORS                                                                                        ONWASA
262000-6                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed; 452O1 1                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAOS. D006
      B.   Type 31 Data Highway Cable, Allen-Bradley "Blue Hose':
               Meet or exceed electrical characteristics of Allen-Bradley Catalog No. 1770-CD.
               Approved by Allen-Bradley for use with A-B programmable logic controller systems.
               Outer Jacket: Blue PVC.
               Shield: 1.35-mu, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide
               100 percent coverage.
               Drain: 55 percent tinned copper braid and drain wire.
               Dimension: 0.243-inch nominal OD.
               Conductors:
               a.   One pair #20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper.
               b    Insulation: Polyethylene.
                    Color Code: BLue and clear.

2.5   GROUNDiNG CONDUCTORS

           Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHHIRFHW-XLPE or THHN/THWN,
           insulation.

           Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper.

2.6   ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

      A.   Tape:
                General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mu, vinyl plastic, rated for 90 degrees C minimum,
                meeting requirements of UL 510.
                Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: &5-mil, vinyl plastic.
                Arc and Fireproofing:
                a.   30-mu, elastomer.

      B.   identification Devices:
           1.   Sleeve:
                a.     Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed black markings.
           2.   Heat Bond Marker:
                      Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure sensitive
                       adhesive.
                       Self-laminating protective shield over text.
                       Machine printed black text.
           3.   Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate.
           4.   Tie-On Cable Marker Tags:
                      Chemical resistant white tag.
                      Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches.
           5.   Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch minimum.
           6.   Nylon, Seif-Insurated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:
                a.    Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
                b.    Seamless.
           7.   Self-Insulated, Free spring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts):
                       UL486C.
                      Plated steel, square wire springs.
           8.  Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector:
                      Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.
                      Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.




ONWASA                                                                                   CONDUCTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILiTY                                               26 2000-7
ARCADIS                                                                                 Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
        C.    Cable Lugs:
                  In accordance with N EMA CC 1.
                  Rated 600 volts of same materiaL as conductor metal.
                  Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
                  a.   Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
                  Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:

              Cable Ties:
              1.  Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable,

        E.    Heat Shrinkable Insulation:
              1.  Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.

2.7     PULLING COMPOUND

              Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed.

              Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, Hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and
              cable.

              Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.

        0.    Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways.

2.8     WARNING TAPE

        A.    As specified in Section 26 25 00, Raceways and Boxes.

2.9     SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

        A.    Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

              Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

              Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise.

              Do not exceed cable manufacturers recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and
              minimum bending radii.

              Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

              Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for copper conductors.

              Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as
              required by equipment terminals.

              Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays,
              and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle



CONDUCTORS                                                                                        ONWASA
26 20 00-8                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
            conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at
            intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.

            Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of instaHed conduit before pulling wires or cab?es.

            Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each
            raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4-inch smaller than raceway inside diameter.

3.2    POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

       A.   Conductors 600 Volts and Below:
                No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at
                 accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering an area
                 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.
                 No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
                 Colors:
                         System                         Conductor                   Color
                         All Systems                    Equipment Grounding         Green
                         240/120 Volts                  Grounded Neutral            White
                         Single-Phase, Three-Wire       One Hot Leg                 Black
                                                        Other Hot Leg               Red
                         208Y/120 Volts                 Grounded Neutral            White
                         Three-Phase, Four-Wire         Phase A                      BlaGk
                                                        Phase B                     Red
                                                        Phase C                      Blue
                         240/120 Volts                  Grounded Neutral            White
                         Three-Phase, Four-Wire         Phase A                      Black
                         Delta, Center Tap              High (wild) Leg             Orange
                         Ground on Single-Phase         Phase C                     Blue
                         480Y1277 Volts                 Grounded Neutral            White
                         Three-Phase, Four-Wire         Phase A                     Brown
                                                        Phase B                     Orange
                                                        Phase C                     Yellow
                         NOTE: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.
            4.   Tracer: Outer covering of white with an identifiable colored strip, other than green, in
                 accordance with NFPA 70.

3.3    CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

       A.   Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:
                 Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.
                 Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one circuit, add
                 number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique.

       B.   Method:
            1.  Conductors Nc. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond markers.
            2.  Cables, and Conductors No. 2 AWG and Larger:
                    Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags.
                    Attach with nylon tie cord.
            3.  Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.




ONWASA                                                                                          CONDUCTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       26 2000-9
ARCAD1S                                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOS. 0006
3A      CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

       A.      Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring            in lighting   arid
               receptacle circuits.

               Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors No. 6
               AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer.

        C.     Connections and Terminations:
                   install wire nuts only on solid conductors.
                    Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and
                    control, circuit conductors.
                    Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power cfrcuit
                    conductors No. 12 AWG and smaller.
                    Install uninsulated crimp connectors arid terminators for instrumentation, control, and
                    power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG.
                    Install  uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit
                    conductors No. 3/0 AWG and larger.
                    InstaLl uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors No. 10 AWG
                    and larger.
               7,   Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection.
                    Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.
                    Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.
                    Compression Lugs:
                         Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete,
                         controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp Is complete.
                         Do not use pliers type crimpers

        D.     Do not use soldered mechanical joints.

        E.     Splices and Terminations:
                    Tape insulate all uninsulated connections.
                    Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape.
                    Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-resistant tape.

        F.     Cap spare conductors and conductors with UL listed end caps.

        G.     Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:
                   Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.
                   Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs,
                   chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect
                   the conductors.

        H.     Control and Instrumentation Wiring:
                    Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation
                    wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs.
                    Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with
                    terminal manufacturer's instructions.
                    Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips.
                    Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under
                    Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control Description, leave pigtails of adequate
                    length for bundled connections.




CONDUCTORS                                                                                          ONWASA
2620 00 -.10                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAOS. D006
          5.   Cable Protection:
               a.  Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling.
               b    All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under floor or
                    grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter.
                    Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables.
                    Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over the shield.

          Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of
          extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet En other assemblies.

3,5   CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING

          Install arc and fireproofing tape on 600-volt single conductors and cables, except those rated
          Type TO throughout their entire exposed length in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays,
          and other indicated locations.

          Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as a single cable.

          Follow tape manufacturers installation instructions.

          Secure tape at intervals of 10 feet with bands of tape binder. Each band to consist of a
          minimum of two wraps directly over each other.

3.6   UNDERGROUND DIRECT BURIAL CABLE

          Install in trench as specified in Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.

          Warning Tape: Install approximately 6 inches above cable, aligned parallel to, and within
          12 inches of centerline of the run.


                                           END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                                         CONDUCTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    2620 00 11
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                             SECTION 26 25 00

                                          RACEWAY AND BOXES

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section.
                 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB,
                 Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Sixteenth Edition.
            2.   ASTM International (ASTM):
                       Al23/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on
                       Iron and Steel Products.
                       A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
                       Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
                       A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
                       Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
                       C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground
                       Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
                       D149, Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid
                       Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.
           3.     Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):
                  569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
           4.     National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA):
                       101, Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT).
                       105, Recommended Practice for Installing Metal Cable Trays.
                       111 Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceway (RNC, ENT, LFNC).
           5.     National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                       250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
                       C80.1, Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
                       C80.3, Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
                       C80.6, Intermediate Metal Conduit (1MG) - Zinc Coated.
                       RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
                      and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
                      TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Tubing and Conduit
                      TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
                      TC 6, PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
                 1.   TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings
                 j.   VE 1, Metallic Gable Tray Systems.
           6.     National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
           7.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
                    .  1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.
                      5, Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
                      6, Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.
                      6A, Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Bronze, and Stainless.
                      50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
                 1.   360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
                 g.   514B, Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.

ONWASA                                                                                  RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    262600 1
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                         514C, Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.
                         651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
                         651A, Standard for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit.
                         797, Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing.
                    I.   870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.
                         1242, Standard for Intermediate Metal Conduit.
                         1660, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.
                         1684, Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.
                         Standard for Optical Fiber and Communication Cable Raceway.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

        A.    Action Submitta]s:
              1.   Manufacturer's Literature:
                        Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
                        PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
                        PVC Schedule 80 conduit
                         PVC tubing (Type EB) conduit.
                        PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.
                        Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
                        Flexible metal, non-Liquid-tight conduit.
                        Conduit fittings.
                       Wireways.
                        Surface metal raceway.
                        Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
                   I.   Junction arid pull boxes used at or below grade.
                        Large junction and pull boxes.
                       Terminal junction boxes.
              2.   Precast Manholes and Handholes:
                   a Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature.
                        Traffic loading calculations.
                        Accessory information.
              3.   Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit.
              4.   Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees.
              5.   Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets.
              6.   Conduit Layout:
                   a.   Provide drawings for underground and concealed conduits including, but not limited
                         to ductbanks, those under floor slabs, concealed in floor slabs and concealed in
                         walls.
                    b.   Provide plans and section showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct
                         bank required for:
                              Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits.
                              Instrumentation and control systems.
                              Communications systems.
                              Empty conduit for future use.
                    c.   Electronic CAD; scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet.

        B.    Informational Submittals:
              1.   Manufacturer's certification of training for PVC coated rigid steel conduit installer.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.    Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
              1.  Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where
                    required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                  ONWASA
2525 00-2                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to
                provide a basis for approval under NEC.
           2.   Materials arid equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
                Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
                applied UL listing mark.

      B.   PVC-Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit Installer; Certified by conduit manufacturer as having
           received minimum 2 hours of training on installation procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   CONDUITAND TUBING

      A.   Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
                Meet requirements of NEMA 080.1 and UL 6.
                Material; Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated protective tayer.

           PVC Schedule 40 Conduit;
               Meet requirements of NEMA TO 2 and UL 651.
               UL Fisted for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight
               exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.
               Furnish without factory-formed bell.

      C.   PVC Schedule 80 Conduit;
               Meet requirements of NEMA IC 2 and UL 651.
               UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight
               exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

           PVC Tubing (Type EB);
               Meet requirements of NEMA IC 6 and UL 651A.
               UL listed for reinforced concrete encasement and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.
               Furnish without factory-formed bell.

      E.   PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit;
           1.  Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1.
           2.  Material;
                   Meet requirements of NEMA 080.1 and UL 6.
                    Exterior Finish; PVC coating, 40 mils nominal thickness, bond to metal shall have
                    tensile strength greater than PVC.
                    Interior finish; Urethane coating, 2 mils nominal thickness.
           3.   Threads; Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane.
           4.   Bendable without damage to either interior or exterior coating.

      F.   Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
                UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.
                Material: Galvanized steel, with an extruded PVC jacket.

      G.   Flexible Metal, Non-liquid-Tight Conduit;
                MeetrequirementsofUL 1.
                Material; Galvanized steel.

2.2   FITTINGS

      A.   Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
           1.   General:

ONWASA                                                                               RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 25 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NcoNwAo8. DOUG
                         Meet requirements of UL 514B.
                         Type: Threaded, galvanized. Setscrew and threadless compression fittings not
                        permitted.
              2.    Bushing:
                    a,  Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.
              3.    Grounding Bushing:
                    a.  Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with
                        soldertess lugs.
              4.    Conduit Hub:
                    a Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw.
                    b.  UL listed for use in wet locations.
              5.    Conduit Bodies:
                    a.  Sized as required by NFPA 70.
              6.    Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
              7.    Unions:
                    a.  Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
              8.    Cable Sealing Fittings:
                        To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
                        For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at connector entry.

        B.    PVC Conduit and Tubing:
                 Meet requirements of NEMA TC-3.
                 Type: PVC, slip-on.

        C.    PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
                    Meet requirements of UL5I4B. PVC coated RGS conduit shall be assembled with all
                    PVC coated RGS components.
                    Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by conduit manufacturer.
                    Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish, Cover shall be of
                    same material as conduit body. PVC coated by conduit man ufacturec
                    Finish: 40-mu PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior.
                    Overlapping pressure-sealing sleeves.
                    Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories PVC-coated.

        D.    Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
                    Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for
                    105 degrees C.
                    Insulated throat and sealing 0-rings.

        E.    Flexible Metal, Non-liquid-Tight Conduit:
                   Meet requirements of UL 514B.
                   Body: Galvanized steel.
                   Throat: Nylon insulated.
                   1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body.
                   1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body.

        F.    Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations:
                   Approved for use in the atmosphere involved.
                   Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas.
                   Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner.
                   Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit.

        G.    Watertight Entrance Seal Device:
              1.  New Construction:


RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                ONWASA
262500-4                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Prtnted: 4.5.2011                                                                                     ARCAD1S
                                                                                     Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                a.   Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring, pressure ring,
                    grommet seal, arid pressure clamp.
           2.   Cored-Hole Application:
                a.   Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane
                     clamp.

2.3   OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

           Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc- or cadmium-plated.

           Cast Aluminum:
           1.   Material:
                    Box: Cast, copper-free aluminum.
                     Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast copper-free aluminum with stainless steel
                    screws.
           2.   Hubs: Threaded.
           3.   Lugs: Cast mounting.

      C.   PVC-Coated Cast Metal:
              Type: One-piece.
              Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum.
              Coating:
                   Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC.
                   Interior Surfaces: 2-mu urethane.

      D.   Nonmetallic:
              Box: PVC.
              Cover PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws.

2.4   JUNCTiON AND PULL BOXES

      A.   Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes.

      B.   Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.

      C.   Large Sheet Steel Box:
                NEMA25O,Typel.
                Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel.
                Cover: Full access, screw type.
                Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant.

      D.   Large Cast Metal Box:
               NEMA 250, Type 4.
               Box: Aluminum, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior mounting lugs.
               Cover: Hinged with screws.
               Gasket: Neoprene.
               Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

      E.   Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations:
               NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved.
               Box: Aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.
               Cover: Hinged with screws.
               Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

      F.   Large Cast Aluminum Box:
ONWASA                                                                              RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                 26 25 00 5
ARCADIS                                                                                   Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                    NEMA25OType 4.
                    Box: Cast copper-free aluminum, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior
                    mounting lugs.
                    Cover: Non-hinged.
                    Gasket: Neoprene.
                    Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

        G.    Large Stainless Steel Box:
                    NEMA25OType4X.
                    Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316 stainless steel with white enamel painted
                    interior mounting panel.
                    Cover: Hinged with screws.
                    Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steeL

        H.    Large Steel Box (Indoor dry Location only):
                    NEMA25OTypeI2.
                    Box: 12-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed exterior, over
                    phosphated surfaces. Provide finish as approved by Engineer.
                    Cover: Hinged with screws.
                    Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

              Large Nonmetallic Box (Indoor corrosive areas only):
                  NEMA 250 Type 4X.
                    Box: H ig h-im pact, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or engineered thermoplastic, with
                    stability to high heat.
                    Cover: Hinged with screws.
                    Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
                    Conduit hubs and mounting lugs.

        J.    Concrete Box, Non-traffic Areas:
                  Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension.
                  Cover: Steel diamond plate with locking bolts.
                  Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.
                  Size: 10 inches by 17 inches, minimum.

        K.    Concrete Box, Traffic Areas:
                  Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension and bottom slab.
                  Cover: Steel checked plate; H/20 loading with screw down.
                  Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.

2.5     TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET

        A,    Material: Codegauge galvanized steel box with hinged doors and 3/4-inch fire-resistant
              plywood backboard, meeting requirements of telephone service provider.

              Finish: Provide finish as approved by Engineer.

              Minimum Size: 16 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.

2.6     TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET

        A.    Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of EIAITJA 569.




RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                  ONWASA
2625 00-6                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
    2.7   TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX

               Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.

               Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.

               Terminal Blocks:
                   Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box,
                   Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum

    2.8   SURFACE METAL RACEWAY

          A.   General:
                   Meet requirements of IJL 5.
                   Material: Two-piece, code-gauge steel.
                    Finish: Factory applied rust inhibiting primer and gray semi-gloss finish suitable for field
                    paInting.
                    Configuration: Single, 1-7I32-inch by 2-3/4-inch section, unless otherwise indicated.
                    Install only where specifically permitted on the Drawings.

T         B.   Fittings and Accessories:
                     Wire clips at 30 inches on-centers.
                    Couplings, cover clips, supporting clips, ground clamps, and elbows as required; to
                    comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

               Outlets:
               1.   Provide brackets or devices covers as required to support wiring devices indicated.

    2.9   METAL WIREWAYS

               Meet requirements of UL 870.

               Type: Stainless Steel-enclosed, lay-in type.

               Cover: Removable, screw type.

               Rating: Outdoor raintight.

               Finish: Stainless steel.

          F    Hardware: Stainless steel to prevent corrosion; screws installed toward the inside protected by
               spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation damage.

          G.   Knockouts: Without knockouts, unless otherwise indicated.

    2.10 NONMETALLIC WIREWAY

               Rating: Outdoor, corrosion resistant, raintight, NEMA Type 12 and Type 3R.

               Type: Fiberglass-enclosed, with removable cover.

               Captivated, corrosion resistant cover screws.

               Oil-resistant gaskets.

    ONWASA                                                                                 RACEWAY AND BOXES
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 2500     7
    ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4,5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
       E.     Meet UL cold impact test to minus 35 degrees C.

2.11   CABLE TRAYS

              MeetrequirementsofNEMAVE 1.

              Type: Ladder, Ventilated channel of welded construction.

              Material: Copper-free aluminum aoy 6063-T6.

              Dimensions: 36 inches wide, with 6-inch NEMA nominal inside fill depth and fittings with 36-
              inch bending radius.

              Barrier Strip: Vertical, solid type, with horizontal fittings and strip clamps.

              Fittings of same material as cross-sectional tray area and hardware of same material as cable
              tray.

        C.    Tray Grounding: Conform to NFPA 70 and NEMA VE 1.

              Provide next higher NEMA VE I class designation than required for support of designed span
              length.

              Design Loads: Use working load adequate for actual cable installed plus 20 percent additional
              weight allowance for future cables with safety factor of 1.5in accordance with NEMA VE 1,
              Table 3-1.

              Expansion Joints: NEMA VE 1 for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation.

              Furnish Cable Tray with no sharp edges, burrs, or weld projections.

              Warning Signs: 1-1/2-inch high black lettering on yellow background with Legend, "WARNING,
              NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR
              PERSON N EL"

212 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

        A.    Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.

        B.    Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.

        C.    Access: Provide cast concrete 6- or 12-inch risers and access hole adapters between top of
              manhole and finished grade at required elevations.

        D.    Drainage:
                   Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other non-draining areas.
                      Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a heavy, cast iron,
                      slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum 4-inch outlet and outlet pipe.

        E.    Raceway Entrances:
                  Provide on all four sides.
                      For raceways to be installed under this Contract, provide knockout panels or precast
                      individual raceway openings.


RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                    ONWASA
2625 00-8                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8, D005
           3.   At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide minimum 12-inch high
                by 24-inch wide knockout panels for future raceway installation.

      F.   Embedded Pulling Iron:
           1. Material: 3/4-inch diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete
              is placed.
           2. Location:
                    VJall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for future raceway
                     entrance.
                     Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.

      G.   Cable Racks:
           1.   Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each
                raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.
           2.   WaIl Attachment:
                     Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not permitted.
                     Insert Spacing. Maximum 3 feet on center for entire inside perimeter of manhole.
                     Arrange so that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation.
                     All cables shall be installed in a neat and organized manner.

           Manhole Frames and Covers:
               Material: Machined cast iron.
               Diameter: 36-1/2 inch.
               Cover Type: Indented, solid top design, with two drop handles each.
               Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.
                Cover Designation: Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum 2 inches in height,
                appropriate titles:
                    600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.
                    TELEPHONE.

           Hand hole Frames and Covers:
           1   Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized.
           2.  Cover Type: Solid, bolt-on, of nonskid] design.
           3.  Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.
           4.  Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral Fetters, minimum 2 inches in
               height, appropriate titles:
                    600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.
                    TELEPHONE.

      J.   Hardware: Steel, hot-dip ga'vanized.

      K    Furnish knockout for ground rod in each hand holes and manholes.

           Manholes and handho!es shall be sized by the Contractor based on the number and size of all
           conduits and conductors that enter and exit the manholefhandhole.

           Manufacturers:
               Utility Vault Co.
              Penn-Cast Products, Inc.
              Concrete Conduit Co.
              Associated Concrete Products, Inc.
              Pipe, Inc.




ONWASA                                                                               RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 2500-9
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
2.13 ACCESSORIES

        A.    Duct Bank Spacers:
                  Type: Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.
                  Suitable for all types of conduit.

        B.    Identification Devices:
                   Raceway Tags:
                         Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal.
                         Shape: Round.
                         Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved.
                         Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.
              2.   Warning Tape:
                         Material: Polyethylene, 4-mu gauge with detectable strip.
                         Color: Red.
                         Width: Minimum 6 inches.
                         Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below tape.
                         Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch high permanent black lettering imprinted
                         continuously over entire length.
              3.   Buried Raceway Marker:
                         Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double-ended arrows, straight for straight runs
                         and bent at locations where runs change direction.
                         Designation: Incise to depth of 3/32 inch, ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4-inch
                         high.
                         Minimum Dimension: 1/4-inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4-inch wide.

        C.    Raceway Coating: Clean and paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting and
              Coating.

        D.     Heat Shrinkable Tubing:
               1,  Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-llnked polyolefin.
                   Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner.
                   Color: Black.

        E.    Wraparound Duct Band:
                  Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-lInked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive.
                  Width: 50 mm minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

        A.    Conduit and Tubing sizes shown are based on the use of copper conductors. Reference
              Section 16120, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors.

        B,    All installed Work shall comply with NECA Installation Standards.

              Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.

              Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.

              Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals
              until time for pulling in conductors.



RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                 ONWASA
262500 10                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. DUOS
           Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete. Install in PVC sleeve or cored
           hole through concrete walls and slabs. Aluminum conduit installed in concrete encased
           ductbanks shall be coated to prevent the conduit from coming ri direct contact with the
           concrete.

           Sealing Fittings; Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above
           sealing fitting.

           Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide
           junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.

           Group raceways installed in same area.

           Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs.

           Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways Avoid obstruction of
           passageways.

           Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicu]ar to walls, structural members, or intersections
           of vertical planes.

           Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing
           steel.

           Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

      0.   Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, and PVC-coated
           galvanized conduit, installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid
           galvanizing compouncL

      P.   Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors,
           wires, or cables.

      0.   Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams.

      ft   Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part
           embedded within slab.

           install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to
           surface and have no curved portion exposed.

           Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 5 data cables in strict
           conformance with the requirements of EIA/TIA 596-A.

3.2   INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

           Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including all fittings.

           Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration.

           Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in
           position.




ONWASA                                                                                 RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATLON FACLLITY                                                   2625 00     II
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
        D.    Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations,
              columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.

        E.    Slabs and Walls:
                  Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of the slab or wall thickness.
                  Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall.
                  Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times conduit trade size,
                  center-to-center, unless otherwise shown
                    Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade
                    size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.
                    Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1 inch.
                    Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection
                    fittings at expansion joints.
                    Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of
                    water holding structures.

        F.    Columns and Beams:
              t   Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness.
              2   Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column cross section.

3.3     CONDUIT APPLICATION

              Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

              Exterior, Exposed:

              PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

              Aluminum.

              lnteror, Exposed:

              PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

              Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):
              1.    Rigid galvanized steel.

              Above ground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:
              1.  PVC Schedule 40 except as noted below in Paragraphs N and 0.

              Direct Earth Burial:
              1.   PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

              Concrete-Encased Raceways:
              1.  PVC Schedule 40, except as noted on the Drawings and below in Paragraphs N and 0.

              Under Slabs-On-Grade:
              1.  PVC Schedule 40.

              Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed PVC-coated rigid steel
              conduit.

              Under Equipment Mounting Pads: PVC Schedule 40 conduit.


RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                              ONWASA
2625 00-12                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                              ARCADIS
                                                                             Project No. NCOMNAO8. 0006
      N.   Exterior Light Pole Foundations: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

      0.   Corrosive Areas:
           1.   PVC Schedule 40, except as noted below in Paragraphs K and L.

      P.   Hazardous Gas Areas:
               PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.
               Aluminum.

      Q.   All conduits from adjustable frequency drives to the associated motor shall be PVC coated
           rigid galvanized steel.

      R.   All conduits that contain signal and communication (i.e. analog) cables shall be PVC coated
           rigid galvanized steel.

3.4   FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

      A.   For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically
           operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible
           connection is required to minimize vibration:
           1,  Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
           2.  Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible.
           3.  Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible metal liquid-tight.
           4.  Dry Areas, Flexible, metallic liquid-tight.
           5.  Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas.
           6.  Length: 18-inch minimum, 60-inch maximum, sufficient to allow movement or adjustment
                of equipment.

           Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, non-liquid-tight conduit.

           Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltigbt and
           Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.

3.5   PENETRATIONS

           Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.

           Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted.

           Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire-
           resistance rating. Apply heat shrinkable tubing or single layer of wraparound duct band to
           metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches
           below concrete surface.

           Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Above ground): Provide non-shrink grout dry-pack, or use
           watertight seal device.

           Entering Structures:
                General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet wIth oakum or expandable plastic
                compound to prevent the entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another.
                Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor:
                    Provide a watertight seal.
                    Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side.



ONWASA                                                                                 RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECL4MATICN FAC]LITY                                                   26 25 00 - 13
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                         With Concrete Encasement; Install watertight entrance seal device on the accessible
                         side.
                         Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into
                         construction with one or more integral flanges.
                         Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent,
                         watertight man ner
              3.    Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
                         Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer.
                         Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached to
                         exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment.
              4.    Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install a watertight entrance
                    seal device.
              5.    Non-waterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete Encasement):
                         Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device.
                         Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic compound or oakum
                         and lead joint, on each side.
              6.    Manholes and Handholes:
                         Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings,
                         Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall.
                         Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless
                         otherwise shown.

3.6     SUPPORT

        A.    Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements, and
              in any case not exceeding 10 feet. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other
              raceways.

        B.    Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze supported conduit, allow
              20 percent extra space for future conduit.

        C.    Application/Type of Conduit Strap:
                   PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Stainless steel.
                   Nonmetallic Conduit: Stainless steel.

        D.    Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
                   Wood: Wood screws.
                   Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts or stainless steel.
                   Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with
                   lock washers and nuts.
                   Steelwork: Machine screws or stainless steel.
                   Location/Type of Hardware:
                        Dry, Noncorrosive Areas; Stainless steel.
                        Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
                        Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

        E.    Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted.
              Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or
              hangers.

        F.    Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless steel or nonmetallic spacers, or
              aluminum with an approved coating, stainless steel, or nonmetallic insulator.




RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                 ONWASA
26 25 00-14                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
37    BENDS

           Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance.

           Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being
           installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches
           minimum.

           Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.

      0.   Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or
           bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.

      E.   Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so
           that bends are parallel.

      F.   Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of
           run, and raceways are same size.

      G.   PVC Conduit:
              Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows.
              90-Degree Bends: Provide rigid steel elbows, PVC-coated where direct buried.
              Use manufacturers recommended method for forming smaller bends.

      H.   Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable
           to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.

3.8   EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS

           Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs

           Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation.

           Provide when transition ing from grade to a structure or device.

           Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.9   PVC CONDUIT

      A.   Solvent Welding:
                Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all jobits.
                Install such that joint is watertight.

      B.   Adapters:
               PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
               PVC to aluminum or PVC coated RGS: PVC female adapter.

      C.   Belied-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining.

3.10 PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

      &    Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



ONWASA                                                                                  RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    2625 00 15
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWA08. DUOS
              Tools and equipment used in cutting, bending, threading and installation of PVC-coated rigid
              conduit shall be designed to limit damage to PVC coating.

              Provide PVC boot to cover all exposed threading.

              Damaged conduit, for whatever reason, will not be accepted.

3.11    WIREWAYS

              Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

              Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown.

              Applications:
                   Metal wireway in indoor dry locations.
                   Nonmetallic wireway in indoor wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations.

3.12 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES

        A.    Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic
              conduit terminating in threaded hubs.

        B.    Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
              1. Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.
              2  Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground
                 system.

        C.    Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
              1.  General:
                      Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required.
                         Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having
                         threaded hubs.
                         Utilize sealing ockriuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of NEMA 3R and
                         NEMA 12 enclosures.
                        Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 boxes
                        and enclosures.
                        Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA4 and NEMA4X boxes and
                        enclosures.
              2.    Aluminum Conduit:
                        Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
                        Install grounding bushing at source enclosure.
                        Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground
                         pad.
              3.    Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors.
              4.    Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain relief connectors.
              5.    PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC-coated, liquid-tight, metallic
                    connector.
              6.    PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut, except where
                    threaded hubs required above

        D.    Motor Control Center, and Free-Standing Enclosures:
                  Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide a grounding
                  jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad.
                  Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings.

RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                 ONWASA
262500-16                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
      313 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS

            A.   Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole,
                 or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.

            B.   Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless
.fl              otherwise shown.

            C.   Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

            D.   Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so coup]ings in adjacent runs are not in same
                 transverse line.

            E.   Union type fittings not permitted.

            F.   Spacers:
                       Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to secure and
                       separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement.
                       Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type
                       conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet.

            G.   Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete
                 placement.

            H,   Transition from Underground to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

                 Installation with Other Piping Systems:
                      Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.
                      Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.
                      Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.

            J.   Metallic Raceway Coating: At couplings and joints, coat with raceway coating.

            K.   Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs
                 from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure.

            L.   Provide defJectional/expansion fittings in conduit runs that exit building or structure below
                 grade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.

            M.   Concrete Encasement:
                     As specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
                     Concrete Color: Red.

            N.   Backfill:
                      As specified in Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.
                      Do nct backfill until inspected by Engineer.

      3.14 CABLE TRAYS

            A.   Install in accordance with Application Information Section of NEMAVE 1.

            B,   Provide accessories as necessary for a complete system.

            C.   Install such that joints are not made at support brackets.

      ONWASA                                                                                     RACEWAY AND BOXES
      NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      262500 17
      ARCADIS                                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
      Project No. NCONWAO8. DOGS
              Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter point of tray
              span.

              Provide ceiling trapeze for all horizontal cable tray.

              Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet of fitting
              extremity.

              Provide expansion joints in accordance with NEMA VE 1 for 25 degrees F maximum
              temperature variation.

              Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a tolerance of 1/8
              inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2 inch.

        F.    Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

              Install without exposed raw edges.

              Maintain 12-inch vertical separation between multitiered trays having a common support, and
              at all crossover locations.

              Provide bonding jumper at each expansion joint and adjustable connection. Provide properly
              sized clamps for each section, elbow, tee, cross, and reducer.

3.15 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

        A.    Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway
              system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

        B.     Size:
                       Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box
                       extensions not permitted.
                       a.   Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit
                            knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space.
                       Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise required for
                       installed fixture.
                       Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.

        C.     Locations:
                   Drawing locations are approximate.
                    To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate outlets
                    as directed by Engineer.
                    Light Switch: Install on lock side of doors.
                    Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout, unless otherwise
                    shown.

        D.    Mounting Height:
              1. General:
                       Dimensions given to centerline of box.
                       Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, adjust up or down
                       to avoid interference. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.
              2.  Light Switch: 48 inches above floor.
              3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
              4. Telephone Outlet: 6 inches above counter tops or 15 inches above floor.
              5. WaIl Mounted Telephone Outlet: 52 inches above floor.
RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                   ONWASA
2625 00 18                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. DUOS
           6       Convenience Receptacle:
                       General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
                       General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom or side flush with
                       top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter tops without backsplash.
                       Industrial Areas, \/Vorkshops: 48 inches above flooc
                       Outdoor, All Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.
                   Specia]-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown.
                   Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

      E.   Install plumb and level.

      F.   Flush Mounted:
               Install with concealed conduit
                   Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush with
                   finished surface.
                   Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box.

      G.   Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural
           member.

      H.   Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows:
           t    Wood: Wood screws.
                Concrete or Brick: Stainless steel bolts and expansion shields
                Hollow Masonry Units: Stainless steel toggle bolts.
                Steelwork: Stainless steel machine screws.

      I.   Provide plaster rings where necessary.

      I    Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supporteft

      K.   Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas.

      L    Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture
           terminal temperature.

           Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support
           fixture.

           Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused
           openings.

3.16 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

           Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit
           runs.

           Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation.

      C,   Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle bends.

      D.   Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable
           codes.




ONWASA                                                                                    RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FAC1LITY                                                         26 25 00 19
ARCADIS                                                                                            Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
       E.    Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are required and their use is
             allowed by applicable codes.

       F.    Installed boxes shall be accessible.

       G.    Do not install on finished surfaces.

        H.   Install plumb and level.

       I.    Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural
             member.

       J.    Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows:
                  Wood: Wood screws.
                  Concrete or Brick: Stainless steel bolts and expansion shields.
                  Hollow Masonry Units: Stainless steel toggle bolts.
                  Steelwork: Stainless steel machine screws.

        K.   Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

       L.    At or Below grade:
                   Install boxes for beJow grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of
                   paved areas, roadways, or walkways.
                   If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above
                   finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.
                   Obtain EngIneer's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or
                   walkways.
                   Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.

        M.    Flush Mounted:
                  Install with concealed conduit.
                  Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box.
                  Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.

        N.    Mounting Hardware:
                 Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Stainless steel.
                 Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel.
                 Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

        0.   Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.

317 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET

             Install with top of cabinet 6 feet above floor.

             Minimum Installed Door Opening: 120 degrees.

3.16 TELEPHONE and data OUTLET

             Provide empty 4-1 1/1 6-inch square, deep outlet box.

             Provide blank single gang raised device cover If cables are not installed.




RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                                    ONWASA
2625 00-20                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.201                                                                                     ARCADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
319 MANHOLES AND HAN DHOLES

       A.   Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with Section 31 23 33 -
            Trenching and Backfilling and Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork.

             Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.

            Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to one end of
            wall, unless otherwise shown.

            Grounding; As specified in Section 2610 10 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

            Drain: Provide drain to daylight as shown.

            Identification; Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown. Stamped
            numbers to be 1-inch minimum height.

3.20 EMPTY RACEWAYS

            Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.

            Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.

            Provide nylon pull cord.

            Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord
            at each end, and at intermediate pull point.

3.21   IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

       A.   Raceway Tags:
                Identify origin and destination.
                 For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum
                 intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted.
                 Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways.
                 Provide noncorrosive wire for attachment.

       B.   Warning Tape: Install approximately 18 inches above underground or concrete-encased
            raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs.

       C.   Buried Raceway Markers:
            1.   Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceways.
            2,   Install at all bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs.
            3.   Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches wide, and
                 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade.

3.22 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

            Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction.

            Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all conduit openings
            during construction.

            Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

ONWASA                                                                                     RACEWAY AND BOXES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                  .                     26 25 00-21
ARCADIS                                                                                           Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
        D.    Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound approved by
              manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers instructions
              until time of use.
                                            END OF SECTION




RACEWAY AND BOXES                                                                             ONWASA
262500-22                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                             ARCADIS
                                                                            Project No. NCONWAOS. DOGS
                                            SECTION 26 30 00

                                             WIRING DEVICES

PART I     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a ]ist of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            1.   ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-
                 Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
            2.   Federal Specifications (ES):
                     W-C-596, General Specification for Connector, Electrical, Power.
                       W-S-896F/GEN, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General
                      Specification).
            3.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                      250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
                      WD 1, General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
            4.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
            5.   Underwriters Laboratories nc. (UL):
                      498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
                      508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment.
                      943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
                      1449, Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for wiring devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   SWITCHES

      A.   Switch, General Purpose:
           1.   NEMAWD 1 and FSW-S-896F/GEN.
           2.   Totally enclosed, so type, with quiet tumbler switches and screw terminals.
           3.   Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy contacts.
           4.   Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads.
           5.   Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
           6.    Color:
                     Office Areas: White.
                     Other Areas: Brown.
           7.    Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting strap.

      B.   Switch, Motor Rated:




ONWASA                                                                                      WIRING DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILIFY                                                      26 30 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                    Type: Two-pole or three-pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch without overload
                    protection.
              2.    Enclosure/Mounting and Rating:
                    a.   General Purpose:
                         1)  Totally enclosed snap-action switch. Quick-make, slow-break design with silver
                             alloy contacts. UL 508 listed.
                         2) General Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac.
                         3) Minimum Motor Ratings:
                             a)2 hp for 120V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
                             a)3 hp for 240V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
                             a)15 hpfor48OVac, three-phase, three-pole.
                         4) Screw-type terminals.
                    b.   Explosion-Proof:
                              Provide enclosed manual motor starter-type. Three-pole non-reversing
                             contactor.
                              Minimum Motor Rating: 10 hp, 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole.
                              Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 7.
                              Provide lockable external handle operator.

2.2     RECEPTACLES

        A.    Receptacle, General Purpose:
              1.  NEMAWD 1 and FSW-C-596.
              2.  Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire terminals.
              3.  Impact resistant nylon cover and body.
              4.  One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless construction).
              5.    Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted blade without
                    detent.
              6.    Rating: 125 volts, NEMAWD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps.
              7.    Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet boxes.
              8.    Industrial Grade:
                    a.  Color:
                               Office Areas: White.
                               Other Areas: Brown.
              9.    Commercial Grade:
                    a.  Color: White.

        B.    Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:
                  Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacles.
                  Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA.
                  Color: White.
                  Standard Model: NEMA WD 1, with screw terminals and provisions for testing.
                  Feed-Through Model: NEMAWD 1, with feed-through screw terminals and provisions for
                  testing.

        C.    Receptacle, Corrosion-Resistant.
                  Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacles.
                  Nickel coated metal parts.
                  Color: Yellow.

        D.    Receptacle, Explosion Proof.
                    ULlisted.
                    Dead front, interlocked, circuit breaking.



WIRING DEVICES                                                                                       ONJWASA
263000 2                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8, 0006
           3    Electrical Ratings: 20 amps, 125 volts.
                Hazardous Area Ratings: NEMA 7BCD, 9FG.
                Provide matching plug with each receptacle.

      E.   Multioutlet Surface Raceway System: Three-wire grounding simplex receptacles spaced on
           9-inch centers with insulated grounding conductor to each receptacle.
                Color: Gray with ivory receptacles.
                Receptacles to meet applicable requirements of Article General Purpose Receptacles.

2.3   DEVICE PLATES

      A,   General: Sectional type plates not permitted

      B.   Plastic:
                Material: Specification grade, 0.10-inch minimum             thickness,   noncombustible,
                thermosetting.
                Color: To match associated wiring device
                Mounting Screw: Oval-head metal, color matched to plate.

      C.   Metal:
                Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness stainless steel.
                Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin.
                Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate.

      D.   Cast Metal:
                Material: Copper-free aluminum, with gaskets.
               Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.

      E.   Sheet Steel:
               Finish: Zinc electroplate.
               Screws: Oval-head stainless steel.

      F.   Engraved:
               Character Height: 1/4 inch.
               Filler: White.

      G.   Weatherproof:
           1.  Receptacles, Weatherproof Type 1:
                    Gasketed, cast-a]uminum, with individual cap over each receptacle opening.
                    UL Listed for WET location while in use.
                    Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel.
           2.  Switches:
               a,   Gasketed, cast-aluminum, incorporating external operator for internal switch.
               b.   Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.

      H.   Raised Sheet Metal: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated steel designed for one-piece
           drawn type sheet steel boxes.

      I.   Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on cast metal boxes.




ONWASA                                                                                     WIRU'IG DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    263000-3
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     SWITCHES

       A.     Switch, General Purpose:
                   Mounting Height: See Section 26 25 00, Raceways and Boxes.
                   Install with switch operation in vertical position.
                   Install single-pole, two-way switches so toggle is in up position when switch is on.

        B.    Switch, Motor Rated:
                   Mounting Height: See Section 26 25 00, Raceways and Boxes.
                   Install with switch operation in vertical position so toggle is in up position when ON.
                   Install within sight of motor when used as a disconnect switch.

3.2     RECEPTACLES

        A.    Duplex Receptacles:
              1.    Install with grounding slot down, except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which
                    case install with neutral slot down.
              2.    Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire only.
              3.    Weatherproof Receptacles:
                         Install in cast metal box.
                         Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle opening.
              4.    Ground FauLt Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where ground fault
                    protection is specified for "downstream' conventional receptacles.
              5.    Special-Purpose Receptacles: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

        B.    Multioutlet Surface Raceway System:
                   Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
                   Wire alternate outlets to each circuit where two-circuit, three-wire supply is shown.

3.3     DEVICE PLATES

              Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure a tight fit to box.

              Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces
              without use of mats or similar materials. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable.

              Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plates have no sharp
              corners or edges.

              Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.

              Engrave with designated titles.

              Types (Unless Otherwise Shown):
                  Office: Plastic.
                    Exterior:
                         Switch: Weatherproof.
                        Receptacle in DAMP location: Weatherproof Type I
                        Receptacle in WET location: Weatherproof Type 2.




WIRING DEVICES                                                                                       ONWASA
263000-4                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8. D0O
      G.   lntedor:
           1.   Flush Mou'nted Boxes: Metal.
           2.   Surface Mounted, Metal Boxes:
                     General Purpose Areas: Sheet Steel.
                     Other Areas: Cast.
           3.   Surface Mounted, Aluminum Boxes:
                     General Purpose Areas: Stamped.
                     Other Areas: Cast.
           4.   Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Boxes Raised sheet steel.
           5.   Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Boxes: Manufacturer's standard.
           6    Receptacle shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1.


                                        END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                               WIRING DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FAC1L]TY                                              26 30 00 5
ARCADIS                                                                               Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                             SECTION 25 35 00

                                 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   RELATED SECTIONS

      A.   This section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment specification.
           Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, synchronous speed, and
           deviations from this section will be listed in the equipment specification. Where such
           deviations occur, they shall take precedence over this section.

13    REFERENCES

      A.   The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
                      9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
                      11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
           2.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, ]nc. (IEEE):
                       85, Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric
                       Machinery.
                       112, Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
                       114, Standard Test Procedures for Single-Phase Induction Motors.
                       620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for Squirrel Cage Induction
                       Motors.
                     841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical lndustrySevere Duty Totally Encrosed
                     Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motorsup to and Including 500 hp.
           3.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                    250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
                     050.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations.
                     MG 1, Motors and Generators.
                     MG 13, Frame Assignments for Alternating Current Integral Horsepower Induction
                     Motors.
           4.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)
           5.   Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
                     1, Flexible Metal Conduit.
                       674, Standard for Safety Electric Motors and Generators for use in Division 1
                       Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
                       2111, Overheating Protection for Motors.

1.4   DEFINITIONS

           CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.

           DIP: Dust-ignition-proof enclosure.




ONWASA                                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     2635 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
              EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.

              Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG I              Section IV,
              Parts 30 and 31.

              Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow for extra
              heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the motor by its controller.

              ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.

              TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure.

              TENV: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated enclosure.

              WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.

              WPI(: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I].

1.5     SLJBMITTALS

        A.    Action Submittals:
              1.   Descriptive information.
              2.   Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
              3.   Additional Rating Information:
                        Service factor.
                        Locked rotor current.
                        No load current.
                        Multispeed load classification (for example, variable torque).
                        Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example, variable torque)
                        and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification.
                        Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor.
              4.    Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).
              5.    Dimensions and total weight.
              6.    Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70.
              7.   Bearing type.
              8.   Bearing lubrication.
              9.   Bearing life.
              10.  Space heater voltage and watts.
              11.  Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motorthermal protection.
              12.  Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
              13. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor.
              14. Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system.

        B.    Informational Submittals:
                   Factory test reports, certified.
                   Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 70 00      Contract Closeout.
                    Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 65 00 -
                    Start-up.




LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS                                                                    ONWASA
26 35 00 2                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5,2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NcONWAO8. DOOB
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   GENERAL

          For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a
          single manufacturer.

          In order to obtain single source responsibility, utilize a single supplier to provide a drive motor,
          its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.

          Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.

          Frame assignments in accordance with NEMA MG 13.

          Provide motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an
          applied UL listing mark.

      E   Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design
          letter classification to fit the application.

          Lifting logs on all motors weighing 100 pounds or more.

          Operating Conditions:
              Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 40 degrees C.
              Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without any reduction being required in
              the nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding the rated temperature rise.
              Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2.2   HORSEPOWER RATING

          As designated in motor-driven equipment specifications.

          Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of the driven equipment at any head capacity
          point on the pump curve not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding any
          service factor.

          Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor): Driven
          equipment brake horsepower at any head capacity point on the pump curve not to exceed
          motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding any service factor.

2.3   SERViCE FACTOR

          Inverter-duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

          Other Motors: 1.16 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

2.4   VOLTAGEANDFREQUENCYRATING

          System Frequency: 60 Hz.

          Volta_ge Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications:
                Size                          Voltage                      I Phases



ONWASA                                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      26 3500 3
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                    Size                            Voltage                         Phases
                    1/2hpandsmaller                 115                             1

                    3/4hpthrough500hp               460                             3


        C.    Suitable for full voltage starting.

        0.    100 hp and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting with 65 percent or 80 percent
              voltage tap settings on reduced inrush motor starters.

        E.    Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply
              terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

2.5     EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR

        A.    For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated and submersible
              motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes, trolleys, and hoists:
              1.   Efficiency:
                         Tested In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59.
                         Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with NEMA MG I Table 12-12, Full-
                         load Efficiencies for NEMA Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or
                         Less (Random Wound), or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications.
              2.   Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer's standard or as
                   indicated in motor-driven equipment Specification.

2.6     LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS

        A.    Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables.

        B.    Safe stall time 12 seconds or greater.

2.7     INSULATION SYSTEMS

              Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer's standard winding insulation
              system.

              Three-Phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven
              equipment specifications, Class F with Class B rise at nameplate horsepower and designated
              operating conditions, except EXP and DIP motors which must be Class B with Class B rise

              Motors With Form-Wound Coils:            Locked     coil   bracing   system   in   accordance with
              NEMA C50.41.

2.8     ENCLOSURES

              Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.

              TEFC and TENV: Furnish with a drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.

              Explosion-Proof (EXP):
                  TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group C
                  and D hazardous locations.
                  Drain holes with drain and breather fittings.



LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCflON MOTORS                                                                       ONWASA
26 35 00-4                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILiTY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                 Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in accordance with UL 2111
                 and NFPA 70.
                 Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal box.

            Submersib[e In accordance with Article Special Motors.

       F.   Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC): In accordance with Article Special Motors.

2.9    TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES

            Oversize main terminal boxes for all motors.

            Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit
            attachment.

            Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.

       0.   Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1, Section 1,
            Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430:
                 Terminal Box Usable Values
                 Voltage                      Horsepower                        Percentage
                 Below600                     l5through 125                     500
                 Below600                     l5Othrough 300                    275
                 Below 600                    350 through 600                   225

            Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.

2.10   BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION

       A.   Horizontal Motors:
                 3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated arid sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball
                 bearings iii labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.
                 1 through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable
                 grease relief plugs.
                 Minimum 100000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined             in
                 ABMA9andABMA 11.

       B.   Vertical Motors:
            1.   Thrust Bearings
                      Plate type (Kingsbury) bearing.
                      Manufacturer's standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller.
                      Oil lubricated 125 hp and larger.
                      Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
            2.   Guide Bearings:
                      Manufacturer's standard bearing type.
                      Manufacturer's standard lubrication 200 hp and smaller.
                      Oil lubricated 250 hp and larger.
                      Minimum 100,000 hours L-1D bearing life.

       C.   Regreasable Antifriction Bearings:
                Readily accessible, grease injection fittings.
                Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs.




ONWASA                                                                LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 35 00-5
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
        D.    Oil Lubrication Systems:
                   Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge.
                   Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs.
                   Provisions for necessary oil circulation arid cooling.

        E.    Inverter Duty Rated Motors:
              1.    Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 20 hp shall have electrically isolated bearings to
                    prevent stray current damage.

2.11    NOISE

              Measured in accordance with IEEE 85 arid NEMA MG 1.

              Motors controlLed by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed sound levels of
              3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.

2.12    BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

        A.    In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.

2.13 EQUIPMENT FINISH

        A.    Protect Motor for Service Conditions:
                   ODP Enclosures: Indoor industrial atmospheres.
                   Other Enclosures: Outdoor industrial atmospheres, including moisture and direct sunlight
                   exposure.

        B.    Field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting Systems.

        C.    Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish.

2.14 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

              Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and WPII enclosures
              meeting requirements for Guarded Machine in NEMA MG 1, and attached with stainless steel
              screws.

              Winding Thermal Protection:
                  Thermostats:
                         Provide on motors with control diagrams and/or motor data sheets that specify
                        thermostats.
                        Bi-metal disk or rod type thermostats embedded in stator windings.
                        Automatic reset contacts rated 120 volts ac, 5 amps minimum, opening on
                        excessive temperature. (Provide manual reset at motor controller.)
                        Leads extending to separate terminal box for motors 100 hp and larger.
              2.    Thermistors:
                         Provide on motors with control diagrams and/or motor data sheets that specify
                        thermistors.
                        Thermistor embedded in each stator phase winding before winding dip and bake
                        process.
                        In intimate contact with winding conductors.




LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS                                                                     ONWASA
26 35 00 6                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FAC1LITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                  d.  Epoxy-potted, solid-state thermistor control module mounted in NEMA 250 Type 4
                      box on motor, by motor manufacturer.
                  a.  Individual thermistor circuits factory-wired to control module.
                      Control module rated for l2OVac power supply.
                      Control module automatically reset contact for external use rated 120 volts ac,
                      5 amps minimum, opening on abnormally high winding temperature. Provide manual
                      reset at motor controller.
             3.   Resistance Temperature Detectors:
                      Provide on motors with control diagrams and/or motor data sheets that specify
                      resistance temperature detectors.
                      100-ohm p]atinum, three-wire, precision resistors with calibrated resistance-
                      temperature characteristics.
                      Six (two each phase) positioned to detect highest winding temperature and located
                      between coil sides in stator slots
                      Leads brought to separate motor terminal box.

        C.   Space Heaters:
                 Provide winding space heaters with leads wired out to separate condulet or terminal box.
                 Provide extra hole or hub on motor terminal box as required.
                  Unless shown otherwise, heater shall be suitable for 120V ac supply, with wattage
                  suitable for motor frame size.

        D.   Nameplates:
                Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum.
                  Display motor data required by NEMAMG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and Paragraph 1040 in
                  addition to bearing numbers for both bearings.
                  Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal efficiency, guaranteed
                  minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for power
                  factor correction capacitors.

             Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer's recommendations and of sufficient size and
Tnumber
        E.
                    for the specified seismic conditions.

  2.15 SPECIAL MOTORS

             Requirements in this article take precedence over conflicting features specified elsewhere in
             this section.

             Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC):
                In accordance with IEEE 841.
                TEFC in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
                  Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in severe-duty applications including high
                  humidity, chemical (corrosive), dirty, or salty atmospheres.
                  Motor Frame, End Shields, Terminal Box, and Fan Cover: Cast iron.
                  Ventilating Fan: Corrosion-resistant, non-sparking, external.
                  Drain and Breather Fittings: Stainless steel.
             7    Nameplate: Stainless steel.
                  Gaskets between terminal box halves and terminal box and motor frame.
                  Extra slinger on rotor shaft to prevent moisture seepage along shaft into motor.
                  Double shielded bearings.
                  125,000 hours minimum L-10 bearing life for direct-connected loads,
                  External Finish: Double-coated epoxy enamel.




  ONWASA                                                                 LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      26 3500-7
  ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
  Project No. NCCNWAO8. 0006
              13. Coated rotor and stator air gap surfaces.
              14. Insulation System, Windings, and Connections:
                       Class F insulation, Class B rise or better at 1.0 service factor.
                       Multiple dips and bakes of non-hygroscopic polyester varnish.
              15. Service Factor:
                       At40 Degrees C Ambient: 1.15,
                       At 65 Degrees C Ambient: 1.00.
              16. Safe Stall Time Without Injurious Heating: 20 seconds minimum.

        C.    Severe-Duty Explosion-Proof: Meet requirements for EXP enclosures and CISD-TEFC
              motors.

        D.    Severe-Duty, Dust-Ignition-Proof: Meet requirements for DIP enclosures and CISD-TEFC
              mOtors.

        E.    Multispeed: Meet requirements for speeds, number of windings, and load torque classification
              indicated in the motor-driven equipment specifications.

        F.    Inverter Duty Motor:
                    Motor supplied power by adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency drives shall be
                    inverter duty rated.
                    Motor shall be suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated.
                    Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published range for motor
                    provided.
                    Motor installed in Division 1 hazardous (classified) location shall be identified as
                    acceptable for variable speed when used in a Division 1 location.

        G.    Submersible Pump Motor:
              1.  At 100 Percent Load:
                         Submersible Pump Motors
                                                       Guaranteed               Guaranteed
                                                       Minimum                  Minimum
                            Horsepower                 Efficiency               Power Factor
                            5throughlD                 80                       82
                            10.1 through 50            85                       82
                            50.1 through 100           87                       82
                            Over 100                   89                       82
              2.    Insulation System: Manufacturer's standard Class B or Class F.
              3.    Motor capable of running dry continuously.
              4.    Enclosure:
                         Hermetically sealed, watertight, for continuous submergence up to 65-foot depth.
                         Listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group D
                         hazardous atmosphere.
                         Seals: Tandem mechanical.
              5.    Bearing and Lubrication:
                         Permanently sealed and lubricated, replaceable antifriction guide and thrust
                         bearings.
                         Minimum 15,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
              6.    Inrush kVNhorsepower no greater than NEMA MG I and NFPA 70, Code F.
              7.    Winding Thermal Protection:
                    a.   Thermal sensor and switch assembly, one each phase, embedded in stator wind ings
                         and wired in series.




LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS                                                                    ONWASA
26 35 00 8                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                     Switches normally closed, open upon excessive winding temperature, and
                     automatically reclose when temperature has cooled to safe operating level.
                     Switch contacts rated at 5 amps, 120V ac.
           8.    Motor Seal Failure Moisture Detection;
                     Probes or sensors to detect moisture beyond seals.
                      Probe or sensor monitoring module for mounting in motor controller, suitable for
                     operation from 120V ac supply.
                     Monitoring module with control power transformer, probe test switch and test light,
                     and two independent 120V ac contacts, one opening arid one closing when the flux
                     of moisture is detected.
           9.    Bearing Overtemperature Protection for Motors Larger than 100 hp:
                     Sensor on lower bearing housing monitoring bearing temperature.
                      Any monitoring relay necessary to provide l2OVac contact opening on bearing
                    overtemperature.
           10. Winding thermal protection, moisture detection, and bearing overtemperature specified
               above may be monitored by a single device providing two independent 120V ac contacts,
               one closing and one opening on malfunction.
           11. Connecting Cables:
                    Two separate cables, one containing power and grounding conductors, and the
                    other containing control and grounding conductors.
                    Each cable suitable for hard service, submersible duty with watertight seal where
                    cable enters motor.
                    Length; 30 feet minimum.
               ft IJL 1 listed and sized in accordance with NFPA 70.

      H.   Inclined Motors:
                 Motors suitable for operation only in horizontal position not acceptable
                 Bearings designed for thrust imposed by driven equipment and by motor rotor when
                 motor is in inclined position.
                 Lubrication system designed to provide adequate bearing lubrication when motor is in
                 inclined position.

2.16 FACTORY TESTCNG

      A.   Tests:
           1.    In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors and IEEE 114 for single-phase
                 motors.
           2.    Routine (production) tests on all motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Test multispeed
                 motors at all speeds.
           3.    For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at 50 percent, 75 percent,
                 and 100 percent of rated horsepower:
                       ri accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMAMG 1, Paragraph 12.59.
                      and Paragraph 12.60.
                      For motors 500 hp and larger where facilities are not available to test by
                     dynamometer (Test Method B), determine efficiency by IEEE 112, Test Method F.
                     On motors of 100 hp and smaller, furnish a certified copy of a motor efficiency test
                     report on an identical motor.
           4.    Provide test reports for polyphase motors 100 hp and larger.

      B.   Test Report Forms:
                    Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-i.
                    Efficiency and power factor by Test Method F, IEEE 112, Forms F-i, F-2, and F-3.
                   Temperature Test: IEEE 112, FormA-2.



ONWASA                                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   26 3500 9
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.201
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
PARTS EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

              In accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

              Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment.

              Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts.

3.2     MANFACTURER'S SERVICES

              Furnish manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 26 10 15 -
              Commissioning of Electrical Systems, for installation assistance, inspection, equipment
              testing, and startup assistance for motors larger than 200 hp.

              Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.


                                                END OF SECTION




LOWNOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS                                                                      ONWASA
263500lU                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                           SECTION 26 40 00

                         INTEGRATED PARALLELING, GENERATOR SYSTEM


GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
           Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
           Section.

1.2   DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM & SITE


           Provide an 1,800 kW integrated paralleling, standby power system to supply electrical power
           at 480 Volts, 60 Hertz, 3 Phases The system will comprise three (3) generators rated 600 kW,
           each and provisions for a fourth generator. The generators shall consist of a liquid cooled
           diesel engine, a synchronous AC alternator, a paralleling switch, emergency switchboard, and
           system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but
           not limited to the items as specified hereinafter This emergency standby system is designed
           for the 1 MGD initial output of the water plant, and shall be expandable to 2,400kW by addition
           of one additional 600kW modular generator set (future) to support 2 MGD future plant build
           out.

           The site is an NEC ordinary location with no specific harsh environment requirements.

           The genset shall be applied at the listed ambient and elevation. Generators shall produce
           rated power output at 105F ambient and 300 feet elevation.

           Each individual genset's sound level shall not exceed 76 dBA at 23 ft based on the
           configuration specified. The total system sound level shall not exceed 807 dBA at 23 ft
           considering each sound level contribution from each generator set at full [oad Calculations
           indicating this sound restriction shall be provided within the submittal package.

1.3   REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

      A,   An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and
           all controls, shall have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering
           prototype model of the equipment to be sold.

      B.   The generator set shall conform to applicable NFPA requirements.

      C.   The generator set shall be available with the Underwriters Laboratories llsting (UL2200) for a
           stationary engine generator assembly.

      0.   The generator set shall meet EPA federal emission guidelines for stationary standby power
           generation.




ONWASA                                                       INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  2640 00-1
ARCADIS                                                                                 Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No, NCONWAO8.0006
1.4     MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

        A.    This system shall be supplied by an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) who has been
              regularly engaged in the production of engine-alternator sets, automatic transfer switches, and
              associated controls for a minimum of 25 years, thereby identifying one source of supply and
              responsibility.

        B.    MANUFACTURERS
                 Generac.
                 Cummins/Onan.
                 Caterpi]lar.
                    Kohler.
                    Or Pre-Approved Equal.

        C.    Manufacturers authorized service representative shall meet the following criteria:
              1  Certified, factory trained industrial generator technicians.
              2. Service support 24/7.
              3, Service location within 200 mUes.
                 Response time of 4 hours.
                 Service & repair parts in stock at performance level of 95%.
                 Offer optional remote monitoring and diagnostic capabilities.

1.5     SUBMITTALS

              Engine Generator specification sheet.

              Controls specification sheet(s).

              Installation/Layout dimensional drawing.

              Wiring schematic.

              Sound data.

              Emission certification.

              Warranty statemenL


              NFPA 110 required AHJ documentation: Prototype test report Certification of torsional
              compatibility; NFPA compliance statement and Certification of rated load testing at factory.

              Alternator thermal damage and decrement curves.

              Generator protective device time current curves.


PRODUCTS

1.6     ENGINES

        A.    Engine Rating and Performance




INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                           ONWASA
26 40 00 2                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NcONWAO8. D008
                Prime movers shall be a liquid cooled, diesel fueled, turbocharged after-cooled engines
                of 4-cycle design. They shall have adequate horsepower to achieve rated kW output with
                an operating speed of 1800 RPM.
                Engines shall support a 100% load step.The system shall be sized and sequenced to
                allow emergency system loads, as defined by NEC 702, to be transferred onto the
                generators, as controlled by the system controller, after alt units are paralleled to the
                48OVAC standby bus.

      B.   The generator shall accept a load step of 637 kW with a maximum frequency dip of 10 Hz.

1.7   ENGINEOILSYSTEMS

           Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by positive displacement lube oil pumps. Engines
           shall have a replaceable oil filters with internal bypass and replaceable elements.

      Engines shall operate on conventional lube oil. Synthetic oils shall not be required.

           Oil shall be cooled by oil coolers, integrated into the engine systems.

1.8   ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMS

      A.   Engine cooling systems shall include unit-mounted radiators, fans, water pumps, and closed
           coolant recovery systems. The coolant systems shall include a coolant fill box, which will
           provide visual means to determine if the system has adequate coolant level. The radiator shall
           be designed for operation in 122 degrees F, (50 degrees C) ambient temperature.

           Engines shall have unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heaters. The
           wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the environment. Heaters shall be
           supplemented by circulating pumps as recommended by the manufacturer.

           EngIne coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs and shut-off valves, shall be
           provided to the outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine
           servicing.

           Radiator fan guards shall be installed for personnel safety that meets UL and OSHA safety
           requirements.

1.9   ENGINE STARTING SYSTEMS

           Starting shall be by a solenoid shift, DC starting system.

           The engine's cranking batteries shall be lead acid type. The batteries shall be sized as BCI
           8D, per manufacturer's recommendations. The batteries shall be the largest available by the
           manufacturer for this generator size. The batteries supplied shall meet NFPA 110 cranking
           requirements of 90 seconds of total crank time. Battery specifications (type, amp-hour rating,
           and cold cranking amps) shall be provided in the submittal.

           Gensets shall have engine driven, battery-charging alternators with integrated voltage
           regulation.




ONWASA                                                        INTEGRATED PARALLELiNG GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                        .              2640 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8.0006
            Gensets shall have automatic dual rate, floatlequalize, 10-amp battery chargers. Chargers
            shall be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The chargers charging current shall
            be monitored within the generator controller to support remote monitoring and diagnostics.
            Battery chargers shall be factory installed on generator sets. Due to line voltage drop
            concerns, battery chargers mounted in transfer switches are unacceptable.

            Thermostatically controlled battery blanket heaters are to be provided to maximize the
            batteries cold cranking capabilities.

1.10   ENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS

            Engine fuel systems shall be designed for operation on #2 diesel fuel and cold weather diesel
            blends.

            Engines shall include a primary fuel filter, water separator, manual fuel priming pump, arid
            engine flexible fuel lines shall be installed at the point of manufacture. Elements shall be
            replaceable paper type.

            The engines suction line shall be fitted with a check valve to secure prime for the engines
            injection pump

            Gensets shall include a secondary duplex fuel filter assembfles capable of switching filters
            without shutting down the engine. Filters shall remove contaminants of 10 microns or larger.

            Gensets shall include secondary fuel filters with electric fuel-heating elements sized to
            increase the fuel temperature 40 degrees F with the engine at 75% load.

1.11   ENGINES CONTROLS

        A     Engines electronic engine control modules (ECM) shall monitor and control engine
              functionality and searnlessly integrate with the genset controller through digital
              communications. ECM monitored parameters shall be integrated into the genset controllers
              NFPA 110 alarm and warning requirements. All ECM fault codes shall be displayed as text
              at the genset controller in standard language. Fault code numbers are not acceptable.

              For engines without ECM functionality or for any additional genset controller monitoring,
              sensors are to be conditioned to a 4-2Oma signal level to enhance noise immunity and all
              sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosion.

              Each engine shall be speed controlled with an integrated isochronous governor function
              with no change in alternator frequency from rio load to full load. Steady state regulation
              shall be 0.25%.

1.12   ENGINE EXHAUST & INTAKE

            The engine exhaust emissions shall meet the EPA emission requirements for standby power
            generation.

            The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple
            the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe
            after the silencer. All components shall be properly sized to assure operation without
            excessive backpressure when installed.




NTEGPTED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                           ONWASA
26 40 00 4                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                               ARCADIS
                                                                              Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
      The manufacturer shall supply a critical grade exhaust silencer as standard. For applications with
          site-specific sound requirements (reference section 1.1), the silencer shall be selected to
          achieve site sound levels.

      C.   For gensets in a weather or sound attenuated enclosure, all exhaust piping from the
           turbocharger discharge to the silencer shall be thermally wrapped to minimize heat dissipation
           inside the enclosure.

      D.   The engine intake air shall be filtered with engine mounted replaceable, dry element filters.

1.13 ALTERNATORS

           Alternators shall match the voltage and phase configuration as specified in paragraph 1.1.A.

           Alternators shall be four-pole, revolving field, stationary armature, synchronous machines. The
           excitation system shall utilize brushless exciters with a three-phase full wave rectifier
           assemblies protected against abnormal transient conditions               by   surge    protectors.
           Photosensitive components will not be permitted in rotating exciters.

      D.   Alternators shall include permanent magnet generators (PMG) for excitation support. The
           system shall supply a minimum short circuit support current of 300% of the rating for 10
           seconds,

      E.   Each alternator shall support 2,600 skVA with a maximum voltage dip of 35 %.

           Three phase alternators shall be 12 lead, broad range capable of supporting voltage
           reconnection. All leads shall be extended into a NEMA 1 connection box for easy termination.
           A fully rated, isolated neutral connection shall be inc]uded by the generator set manufacturer.

      G.   Alternators shall use a single, sealed bearing design. Rotors shall be connected to engine
           flywheels using flexible drive disks. Stators shall be direct connected to the engines to ensure
           permanent alignment.

      I.   Alternators' nominal kW shall meet temperature rise standards of UL2200 (120 degrees C).
           The insulation system material shall be class "H" capable of withstanding 150 degrees C
           temperature rise.

      K.   Alternators shall be protected against overloads and short circuit conditions b' advanced
           control panel protective functions. The control panel shall provide a time current (I t) algorithm
           that protects the alternator against short circuits. To ensure precision protection and
           repeatable trip characteristics, these functions shall be implemented electronically in the
           generator control panel. Thermal-magnetic breaker implementations are not acceptable.

           A strip heater shall be installed in each alternator to prevent moisture condensation from
           forming on the alternator windings. A tropical coating shall also be applied to the alternator
           windings to provide additional protection.

1.14 CONTROLS & OPERATING SEQUENCE

     A.    Genset Controllers




ONWASA                                                        INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       264000-5
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.201
Project No. NCONWAO8.D006
              Each generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor based
              paralleling control system for standby emergency engine generators meeting all
              requirements of NFPA 110 level 1.

              Generator control systems shall be fully integrated paralleling control systems enabling
              remote diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions.
              Generator controllers shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator
              functions including engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing, voltage
              regulation, synchronizing, load-sharing (real and reactive) and all related generator
              operations.
              Digital communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus
              protocol without network cards. Optional internet and intranet connectivity shall be
              available.
              Control systems shall provide an environmentally sealed design including encapsulated
              circuit boards and seated automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board
              connections. The use of non-encapsulated boards, edge cards, and PC ribbon cable
              connections are considered unacceptable.
              Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit
              boards that utilize large capacitors or heat sinks shall utilize encapsulation methods to
              securely support these components.
              Gensets shall be maintained to remain reliab]e. Predictive maintenance algorithms help
              ensures that this maintenance work is performed.
              Provide predictive maintenance algorithms that alarm when maintenance is required.
              Controllers shall have the capability to call out to the local servicing dealer when
              maintenance is required.
              Provide diagnostic capabilities that include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to
              capture operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or
              output parameters, callout capabilities, support for multichannel digital strip chart
              functionality and 0.2 msec data logging capabilities.
              Provide instantaneous and steady state protective trip points for system level protection.
              In addition to standard NFPA 110 alarms, the application loads shall also be protected
              through instantaneous and steady state protective settings on system voltage, frequency,
              and power levels.
              Control systems shall provide prewired customer use I/O: four relay outputs (user
              definable functions), four contact inputs, two analog inputs, communications support via
              RS232, and RS485. Additional I/O shall be an available option.
              The flexibility to meet site-specific application control needs at a generator level
              minimizes risks of a failure to a supporting system impacting more than one generator.
              Examples may include louver control, fuel transfer control, etc.
              Customer I/O shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data
              logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality inside
              the generator controller shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The
              ladder logic function shall have access to        all   the controller inputs and customer
              assignable outputs.
          14, Control panels shall include a touch screen to display all user pertinent unit parameters
              including: engine and alternator operating conditions; oil pressure and oil temperature;
              coolant temperature and level alarm; fuel level; engine speed; DC battery voltage; run
              time hours; generator voltages, amps, frequency, kilowatts, and power factor; alarm
              status and current alarm(s) condition per NFPA 110 level 1.




INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                       ONWASA
26 40 00 6                                            NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                             ARCADIS
                                                                            Project No. NCONWAO8. DUOS
1.15   PARALLELING SYSTEM CONTROLLER

            The system controller shall be an integrated microprocessor based solution providing full
            digital integration with the generator paraUeling controllers. The system controller shall utilize
            standard hardware and firmware manufactured by the generator supplier. The use of PLC
            based solutions will be considered less desirable due to reliability and support concerns posed
            by custom hardware/custom software solutions. A preference will be shown for designs that
            use the same control board hardware for both the generator(s) and system controller.

            The system controller shall meet the same hardware requirements as listed for the generator
            controller in sections 1.13.A.3 to 1.13.A.9 and 1.13.A.14.

            Provide a touch screen display on the control panel that provides intuitive access to all user
            pertinent system status information.

            The power for the system controller shall utilize redundant DC sources - an internal DC source
            inclusive of charging system and an external DC source from one of the generator's cranking
            batteries.

            The system controller shall interface with the generators using digital communications. Any of
            the generator(s) status, operation conditions, or configuration parameters shall be accessible
            with a single point digital communication via the system controller.

            The system controller shall provide sequence of facility loads through three priority loading
            (permissive) load steps and three load shedding steps. These output parameters function
            based on the number of generators on the generator bus. The priority loading function
            provides sequential permissive contact closures enabling load to be transferred onto the
            generator in response to generators coming on-line. The load shedding function provides
            contact closures that disconnects load from the generator bus In response to a reduction in
            available generator capacity.

            In addition to the communication requirements identified in 1.13.A.3, the system controller
            shall provide modem communications as standard

            The system controller and digital communications shall enhance system operation but neither
            shall be required to synchronize or operate the generators in parallel. Systems that require
            external control hardware or digital communications to synchronize and operate the
            generators in parallel are not acceptable.

            The design of the system shall allow continued generator paralleled operation with failures to
            the system controller and/or communication. Control systems that have any systemic single
            point failure modes are not acceptable. This is inclusive of systems that rely on reactive cross
            current and isochronous load sharing control loops. Control systems that rely on redundant
            communications will be evaluated for potential common mode failures that can affect both of
            communication channels.


1.16 AUTOMATIC REDUNDANT LOAD SEQUENCER

       A.   If either communications or the system controller fails, the generators shall automatically start
            based on a hardwired, two-wire start contact from a transfer switch. The generators shall
            automatically parallel together energizing the generator bus. The generator paralleling



ONWASA                                                         INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiliTY                                                  2640 00-7
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8.D006
              controllers are to manage load sharing based on internal algorithms. When operating in a
              backup mode, systems that require active communications to balance generator loads are not
              acceptable.

        B.    An automatic redundant load-sequencing device will be provided to rep]ace the load
              sequencing functionality performed by the system controller. This backup system shall be
              hardwired and not rely on communications which may have been compromised. This device
              shall receive a "generator on-line" input contact from each generator. Using this information,
              this device will sequence the system load on & off using three permissive and three load-shed
              steps.

1.17 OPERATING SEQUENCE

              Upon the failure of utility power, an automatic transfer switch (ATS) provides a two-wire start
              signal to the system controller. The system controller sends a start command to the
              generators via RS485 communication. The first generator that reaches rated voltage and
              frequency requests permission to close into the "dead" generator bus. This shall provide dead
              bus arbitration. After this process, the generator closes its paralleling switch connecting to the
              generator bus.

              If the system has an emergency system transfer switch, it will typically transfer to the first
              generator on-line. If the emergency system load is larger than a single unit is, two generators
              may be configured to come on-line prior to transferring the emergency system load.

              The system controller compares the on-line generator capacity                 to   additional   load
              segmentation. When adequate generator capacity becomes available, the system controller
              enables the priority one loads to be switched to the generator bus. This is typically
              accomplished by providing a permissive contact to the ATS. The system controller shall
              support three load steps.

              Additional generators upon sensing generator bus voltage synchronize and parallel to the
               generator bus.

              The system controller shall provide load-shed capability via programmed outputs based on a
              comparison of the number of generators on-line and connected load requirements. Three
              load-shed outputs shall be provided for this purpose. Load shedding may not need to occur in
              systems with planned for additional generator capacity or in systems that are lightly loaded
              due to typical load factors. The system controller shall be easily reconfigured to match
              expected load conditions. Load shedding is possible through an ATS, shunt trip breakers, or
              control circuits.

              Once utility power has returned, the two-wire start signal will be removed. The generator
              paralleling contactors will open, generators will run in an adjustable cool down mode, and then
              generators shut down.

              Transfer switches supplied shall be capable of being inhibited from transferring with a contact
              from the system controller. The transfer switches supplied shall also be able to shed load via
              the trip-to-neutral feature. Once the load is shed, it will not reclose to a utility that may have a
              fault present.




 NTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                          ONWASA
26 40 00 - 8                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILiTY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                                       Prect No. NCONWAO8. 0006
1.18   ENGINE ALTERNATOR PACKAGING

       A.   Engine/alternators shall be bolted directly to genset frames and the entire frame shall be
            mounted on spring isolators.

            A mainline, thermal magnetic circuit breaker carrying the UL mark shall be factory installed on
            each generator. The breaker shall be rated between 100 to 125% of the rated ampacity of the
            genset. The line side connections are fed from the alternator, and the load side of the breaker
            shall feed a paralleling switch. The breaker shall have an auxiliary contact and shunt trip. The
            breaker will function as a redundant tripping device in the system. If the paralleling switch fails
            to open, when required, the generator breaker will be shunt tripped.

            Each generator shall include a cycle rated paralleling switch using proven contactor
            technology. The mechanism shall have a minimum cycle life of 20,000 operations. The
            generator-paralleling switch shall be mounted in the generator connection box. Solutions
            utilizing motor operated or stored energy breakers for generator paraLleling shall provide
            documentation showing 20,000-operation cycle rating capability.

       0.   Each generator shall include a unit mounted auxiliary power AC load center, rated 125 amps.
            All ancillary AC devices (block heater, battery charger, aLternator strip heater, etc) shall have a
            dedicated circuit breaker within the load center.

1.19 ENCLOSURES

            Each genset shall be packaged with a sound attenuating, weather protective enclosure.

            Enclosures shall be made of steel with a minimum thickness of 14 gauge. Enclosures shall
            have hinged removable doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The
            hinges shall allow for door fit adjustment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners will be stainless
            steel or JS5000 Pop-rivets are not permitted on external painted surfaces. Each door will
            have lockable hardware with identical keys.

            Enclosures shall be coated with electrostaticaUy applied powder paint, baked and finished to
            manufacturer's specifications. The color will be manufacturer's standard.

            Each sound attenuated enclosure shall utilize a vertically discharging radiator hood. The
            enclosure shall be completely lined with sound absorbing material. This material shall be of a
            self-extinguishing design that will not support combustion.

            Genset silencers shall be mounted on top of enclosures.

            Enclosures shall include a thermostatically controlled space heaters designed to maintain the
            enclosure at 40 degrees F.

1.20 SUB-BASE FUEL TANKS

             Each generator shall include a double wall, sub-base mounted, UL142 listed fuel tank. The
            tank shall be sized to provide 24 hours of run time.

            Tanks shall include fuel suction and return connections, normal and emergency vents,
            secondary containment emergency vent, rupture basin sensor, mechanical fuel level
            indication, and a stub-up area convenient for electrical conduit entry.




ONWASA                                                          INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 40 00-9
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8.D006
        C.    Tanks shalt use electric fuel sensors to provide an analog indication of fuel level. Controllers
              shall have a warning indication on low fuel level and provide optional shutdown functionality
              for low, low fuel leveL

              Tanks shall have a built-in catch basins to secure genset coolant and oil against an accidental
              spills.

              Tanks shall be supplied by the engine-generator set manufacturer and be installed before
              shipment.

              Tanks shall include a fuel spilt box with spill sensor, automatic overflow fill valve, and the
              normal vent elevated 12 feet above finished grade.

1.21    LOOSE ITEMS

        A.    Supplier shall itemize loose parts that require site mounting and installation.

1.22 SPARE PARTS:

              Fuses: One spare set

              Filters One spare set (air, fuel, oil)

1.23 REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

        A.    Provide an NFPA 110/99 compliant alarm annunciator panel for remote indication. The panel
              shall have an ALARM switch that when moved to the OFF position silences the audible alarm.
              A TEST/RESET switch shall be included to verify the tights are functional and reset any
              condition after it has cleared. The annunciator shall be controlled using RS485
              communications from the generator controller. Annunciators requiring individual contacts and
              wires per indication point are not preferred.

1.24 ADDITIONAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

        A.    Factory testing

                    Before shipment of the equipment, the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated
                    load for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Tests shall
                    include:
                         Verification of voltage & frequency stability.
                         Verification of transient vo]tage & frequency dip response.
                         Load test the generator for 2 hours.
                         Verification of paralleling and load sharing capabilities

         B.   Load testing to be performed at rated power factor.

1.25 MANUALS

        A.    Three (3) sets of owner's manuals specific to the product supplied shall accompany delivery of
              the equipment. General operating instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams,
              schematics and parts exploded views specific to this model shall be included.




INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                          ONWASA
264000-10                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILIFY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                                       Project No. NcoNwAos. 0006
EXECUTiON

126 INSTALLATION

      A,   Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

      B.   Mounting: mount on suitable spring-type vibration solators.

      C.   Engines:
                Provide initial fill of CD/SE classification lubrication oil as instructed by manufacturer.
                Install all filters.

      D.   Fuel System: Provide initial fill of fuel tank with fuel grade as previously specified. Fill to
           capacity and refill to capacity after completion of start-up and load testing.

      E.   Cooling System: Provide initial fill of coolant.

      F.   Exhaust System:
           1.  Install condensation trap at tow point of exhaust piping

      G.   Repaint any portions of the finish damaged during instatlation

      H.   ADJUSTING
           1. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speeft

      I.   CLEANING
           1. Clean engine and generator surfaces.

      J.   MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
               Prepare and start standby generator unit for testing and demonstration.
               Provide report indicating field test and inspection procedures and test results.
               Coordinate with transfer switch operations for automatic starting and stopping of standby
                power system.

      K.   DEMONSTRATION
              Prepare and start systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
              Provide systems demonstration for a minimum of 2 hours.
                Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source and demonstration that system
                operates to provide standby power.

      L.   Provide full load test utilizing normal loading of plant connectable loads for 2 hours minimum.
           Simulate power failure (two times) including operation of transfer switch, automatic starting
           cycle, and automatic shutdown and return to normal. Document all transfer, cool down and
           return to normal times for OWNER's records as well as ampacity on each phase. Record the
           following:
                Amperes.
                Voltage.
                 Coolant temperature.
                 Frequency.
                 Oil pressure.

      M.   Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions.




ONWASA                                                          INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   2640 00-11
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8.0006
        N.    Exercise the engine-generator set once a week for 1/2 hour time duration until completion of
              the 30-day acceptance test. Provide all fuel for exercising.

        0.    Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all external fuel
              connections in accordance with requirements of NEC, NFPA, and the manufacturer's
              recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer.

1.27 SERVICE

        A.    Supplier of the genset and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this
              trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service
              personnel on 24 hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty
              and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this
              service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of
              these specifications. Service contracts shalt also be available.

1.28 TRAINING

        A.    Eight (8) hours of training shall be supplied by the manufacturer. The training shall cover basic
              generator operation and common generator issues that can be managed by the end-user.
              Training shalt include manual operation of the system.



                                               END OF SECTION




INTEGRATED PARALLELING GENERATOR SYSTEM                                                            ONWASA
264000-12                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAOS. D006
                                             SECTION 26 40 01

                               PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
                                     INFLUENT PUMP STATION


PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   WORK INCLUDED

      A.    This section covers work necessary for one engine-generator set as listed below:
                 Engine-Generator at Northwest Regional Influent Pump Station.
                      The engine-generator shall be the product of one company and that company and
                      its authorized dealer shall have sole responsibility for the performance of the diesel
                      engine-generator sets and its accessories.
                      Provide all labor, materials, and equipment to furnish, instaLl, and place in operation
                       the power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and
                       manufacturer's drawings and installation instructions. These specifications also
                       describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of the power system.

      B.    The generator manufacturer shall also furnish an Automatic Transfer Switch set

1.3   SYSTEM DESCRIPTiON

      A.    The electric power generating systems shall be rated at 125 KW with a 0.8 power factor, 480
            volts, Wye connected, 3 phase, and 60 hertz. This power shall be applied for standby
            operation to power electrical load as shown on the one-line diagrams. The generator shall be
            capable to start and run the pumps shown on the drawings. A maximum voltage drop of 30
            percent at start-up is acceptable.

1.4   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

      A.    The generator set will be used as stand-by power source.

1.5   GENERATOR SET

            The generator set startlstop sequence shall be initiated manually or automatically.

            The set shall immediately shut down in the event of over-speed, ow oil pressure, high water
            temperature and over-crank. A light annunciator shall indicate cause of shutdown. System
            logic shall prevent restart until fault is cleared.

1.6   SITE CONDITIONS

      A.   The operating environment of the power generating system shall be:
           1.  Altitude 500 ft




ONWASA                                PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                          2640 01 - 1
ARCADIS                                                                           Prirted: 45.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
            2.   Engine room temperature, max 104° F
            3.   Outside temperature, mm          100 F
            4.   Engine jacket water, glycol 50%
            5.   Installation   Enclosure
            6.   Fuel type      Diesel
            7.   Cooling System Type Radiator, Blower fan, engine mounted

1.7   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
            1  Component List - Breakdown of all components and options, including power distribution
                 panel.
            2.   Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet
                 identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component
                 design and performance data.
            3    Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including transfer switch, power
                 distribution panel, vibration isolators, and fuel tank.
                 Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overaU generator set measurements,
                 mounting location, and interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling and drain
                 lines.
                 Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel drawings published by
                 the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC) format for controls and power showing
                 interconnected points and logic diagrams for use by contractor and owner.
                 Warranty Statements Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.
            7    Service - Location and description of supplier's parts and service facility including parts
                 inventory and number of qualified generator set service personnel.
            8.   Noise Attenuation exhaust system and enclosure.

1.8   SERVICE AND WARRANTY

            The Standby Power System electrical components, the complete electric plant, its controls,
            and automatic transfer switch shall be warranted against defective materials and workmanship
            for a period of two years. Warranty shall include corrective labor and transportation.

            The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factory-trained
            servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance, and warranty
            administration

1.9   PROXIMITY TO JOB SITE

      A.    The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall have a parts and service facility within 50 miles of
            the job site.

1.10 SUPPLIER

      A.    Subject to the specification requirements, the Standby Power System shall be by Caterpillar,
            Cummins-Onan, Generac, Kohleror pre-approved equal.




PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION                                  ONWASA
2640 01 2                                         NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.52011                                                                          ARCADIS
                                                                        Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
PART 2 EQUIPMENT

2.1    ENGINE

      A.   The engine shall be a stationary, liquid cooled, 1800-rpm, four-stroke design, vertical in-Fine or
           V type, with dry exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States.

2.2   ENGINE EQUIPMENT

      A.   The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge, lubricating oil
           cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature gauge, service hour meter,
           flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable.

2.3    RADIATOR, ENGINE MOUNTED

      A.   Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere through a
           close-coupled radiator. The generator set shall be installed in a drop-over enclosure and have
           a 50 % antifreeze/coolant mixture. The radiator shall cool the jacket water while the engine is
           operating at full site capability arid 0.12 kPa external air restriction. Additional restriction
           affecting airflow shall not limit the radiator's capability to adequately cool at maximum site
           temperature.
               Provide a jacket water heater suitable for operation on 120-volts, single-phase
               Provide isolation valves on the water lines.

2.4   EXHAUST SYSTEM

      A.   The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly and
           silently with minimum restriction.

2.5   EXHAUST NOISE CONTROL

           The exhaust silencer shall be sized and supplied by the engine supplier.

           The silencer shall be mounted on the roof of the enclosure and include all mounting hardware,
           exhaust tailpipe cut to prevent rain entry, stainless steel exhaust flex and penetration thimble
           with rain collar. A provision for draining moisture shall be included.

2.6   WIRING AND CONDUIT

      A.   Engine and generator control wiring shall be multistrand annealed copper conductors encased
           by crosslinked polyethylene insulation resistant to heat, abrasion, oil, water, antifreeze, and
           diesel fuel. Wiring shall be suitable for continuous use at 120 degrees C (250 degrees F) with
           insulation not brittle at 50 degrees C (-60 degrees F). Each cable will be heat stamped
           throughout the entire length to identify the cable's origin and termination. Cables shall be
           enclosed in nylon flexible conduit that is slotted to allow easy access and moisture to escape.
           Reusable bulkhead fittings will attach the conduit to generator set mounted junction boxes.

2.7   GENERATOR

      A.   The generator shall be rated for standby service as shown with 0.8 PF, 480V, three-phase,
           wye-connected, 60 Hz, 1800 rpm. The generator shall be single bearing synchronous type,
           suitable for direct connection to the engine. It shall be designed, manufactured and tested in



ONWASA                                PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                          264001 3
ARCADIS                                                                           Prjnted: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
            accordance with the latest issue of NEMA MGi, IEEE and ANSI standards that cover the
            equipment described herein.

2.8    Circuit breaker-generator set-mounted

       A.   Provide a generator mounted main circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall be a molded case
            type circuit breaker mounted in a guarded drip-proof enclosure and connected (wired) as
            required to the generator.

2.9    STRUCTURE

       A.   The generator shall be close coupled, drip proof and guarded, constructed to NEMA
            standards, guarded, single bearing, salient pole, revolving field, and synchronous type with
            amortisseur wind rigs in the pole faces of the rotating field.

2.10 WLNDINGS

       A.   Thermal Class 200 magnet wire as described by NEMA Magnet Wire Standard MW 1000,
            Section MW 35-C, shall be used for rotor and stator wind ings. The windings shall consist of
            copper magnet wire coated with an underlay of polyester (amide) resins and a superimposed
            heavy coat of polyamideimide resins. All winding insulation materials shall be Class H in
            accordance with BS and IEEE standards. No materials shall be used which support fungus
            growth, and shall be impervious to oil, dirt, and fumes encountered in diesel and natural gas
            engine operating environments.

2.11   WINDINGS-LOW VOLTAGE

       A.   The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy-based material applied
            to each layer of magnet wire. Stator shall have at least two dips arid bakes using Class H
            impregnating varnish. Basic lightning impulse insulation level (BIL) shall not be less than 3 kV.
            Windings shall be tested at 3000 volts AC.

2.12   EXCITATION

       A.   The generator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting of a three-phase armature
            and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors
            shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage spikes.

2.13 VOLTAGE REGULATOR

            The automatic voltage regulator shall maintain generator output voltage by controlling the
            current applied to the exciter field of the generator.

            The regulator shall be a totally solid-state design which includes electronic voltage buildup and
            over-current protection. It shall incorporate 1:1 volts per Hertz characteristics with the
            regulated voltage a linear function proportional to frequency over a 30 to 70 Hz range. The
            regulator shall have 3-phase sensing.

            The regulator shall be suitable for mounting within or external to the generator assembLy, and
            have remote voltage level control in the control panel. As installed, the voltage regulator shall
            meet the applicable sections of the following standards:
            1.   Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)




PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION                                  ONWASA
2640 01 .- 4                                      NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                         ARCADIS
                                                                       Proiect No. 'JCONWAO8. 0006
                2.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

    2.14 MOUNTING

           A.   The engine-generator manufacturer shall assemble the engine and generator to a common
                base. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the engine-generator
                manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and minimize resonant linear vibration.

    2.15 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

           A.   Adjustable height spring type isolators sized to support the wet weight of the generator with
                97% isolation efficiency shall support the generator set.

    2.16   FUEL STORAGE TANK

           A.   A double-walled fuel sub base tank shall be provided which complies with local codes and
                ordinances. The fuel tank capacity shall be sufficient for 24 hours at 100 percent load
                (minimum capacity of 100 gallons). The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections, low-
                level float switch, fuel gauge, and an integral rupture basin with leak detector float switch. Both
                float switches shall be wired to the control panel and light alarm lights. The tank shall be
                fabricated from structural steel shapes and sheet steel plates, minimum 3/16 thick, welded
                construction, capable of supporting the weight of the generator, isolators and enclosure. The
                tank shall have 4 lifting eyes capable of lifting the entire generator set package. Tanks
                fabricated from press broke sheet steel are not acceptable.

    2.17 ENGINE-GENERATOR ENCLOSURE

           A.   Provide a sound attenuated weather-proof enclosure to contain the generator and all
                accessories except the ATS. The enclosure shall attenuate the generator set, with the engine
                running at full load, to a maximum radiated sound level of 70 decibels at 7 meters from any
                point on the machine as measured on the A scale. Provide closed cell sound attenuating liner
                material and air inlet and outlet sound attenuating hoods. The enclosure shall be constructed
                of Aluminum metal, primed and painted with two coats of alkyd enamel, color as selected by
                the owner or engineer. Provide a minimum of four piano-hinged, gasketed, lockable doors and
                a radiator fill access cover.

    2.18 STARTING SYSTEM

           A.   The engine shall be equipped with automatic starting by 24-volt battery driven starter.
                Batteries minimum capacity shall be 190 Amp-Hour. The batteries shall be housed in an acid
                resistant frame or box mounted adjacent to the engine. The location of the battery container
                shall not interfere with the maintenance and inspection of the engine.

                An automatic battery charger shall be furnished for the batteries. The charger shall operate
                from 120-volt, single-phase supply. The charger shall be solid state, current limiting with float
                equalize failure, timer, and battery charger failure contact wired to the control panel.

           C.   Provide all cables and connectors necessary.




    ONWASA                                PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                          26 4001 5
-   ARCADIS
    Project No. NCONWAQ8. D006
                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
2.19 CONTROLS, PROTECTION, AND MONITORING

     A.    The controls, protection, and monitoring systems of the generator set and its operation shall
           be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All subsystem components, interfaces,
           and Logic shall be compatible with engine-mounted devices.

      B.   Furnish a generator local control and monitoring panel and an automatic transfer switch as
           specified below. The local generator control panel shall be mounted on the engine-generator
           set. It shall incorporate 100% solid state microprocessor based control circuitry, sealed dust
           tight, with watertight modular components, metal housings, and digitaL instrumentation.

      C.   The generator protection shall include over-current and internal wiring fault protection as a
           minimum Surge arrester and surge capacitor protection shall also be provided.

      D.   Instrumentation and metering shall include but not be limited to the following:
                Voltmeter and Voltmeter Switch
                Ammeter and Ammeter Switch
                Frequency Meter
                Watt-hour Meter
                Power Factor Meter
                Elapsed Time Meter on the Engine

      E.   The panel shall include the following equipment:
               Generator AC Output Metering Devices
                Engine Monitoring Devices
               a.   Back-Lit LCD to sequentially rotate display of operating hours, engine RPM, battery
                    DC volts, oil pressure, and jacket water temperature.
               Controls:
                a.  Generator voltage level rheostat and ammeter/voltmeter phase selector switch shall
                    be mounted art the panel door. The engine start-stop switch shall be door mounted
                    and include positions for off/reset, run/start, stop, and automatic mode. Start-stop
                    logic shall have provisions for cycle cranking and cool down operation.
                Shutdowns/Annunciation:
                a.   The generator set shall shut down and red-flashing LEDs shall signal operational
                     faults of high water temperature, low oil pressure, over-crank, and over-speed.
           5    Alarms/Annunciation:
                a.   The panel shall include alarms for approach high water temperature, approach low
                     oil pressure, low water temperature, battery charger failure, low fuel level and fuel in
                     rupture basin.
           6.   Safety Devices:
                a.   ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, and all controls,
                     annunciation, and monitors labeled with ISO symbols.


2,20 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

     A.    Scope
           1.   Furnish an Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) with number of poles, amperage, voltage,
                and withstand current ratings as shown on the plans. The automatic transfer switch shall
                consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch unit and a control module
                interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The transfer switch and control
                module shall be the product of the same manufacturer




PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION                                  ONWASA
264001 6                                          NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed; 4.5.2011                                                                         ARCADIS
                                                                        Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
          B.   Codes and Standards
                      The automatic transfer switches and accessories shall conform to and be
                      appropriately labeled to the requirements of:
                      a,    UL 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches
                            NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
                            NFPA 110- Emergency and Standby Power Systems
                            IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and
                            Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
                            NEMA Standard ICS1O (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic Transfer Switches

          C.   Mechanically Held Transfer Switch
                    The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
                    electrical operator shall be a single-solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized. Main
                    operators which include over-current disconnect devices will not be accepted. The switch
                    shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions, normal or
                    emergency.
                    Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts
                    thereof that are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between
                    two active power sources is not acceptable.

          D.   Enclosure
                   The ATS shall be furnished in a stainless steel NEMA Type 4X enclosure.
                    Provide a strip heater with thermostat for outdoor enclosures. Power for the heater shall
                    be derived internally within the ATS.

          E.   Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing

r              1.   Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources shall be continuously
                    monitored.

          F.   Time Delays
                   A time delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay
                   all transfer and engine starting signals.
                   A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes
                   for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
                   A time delay shall be provided on retransfer to normal, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes.
                   Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and normal source
                   is acceptable.
                   A time delay shall be provided on shutdown of engine generator for cool down.
                   All time delays shall be fully field adjustable without the use of tools.

          G.   Additional Features
                   Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact,
                   closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when
                   the ATS is connected to the emergency source. Provide similar auxiliary contacts
                   consisting of one contact, closed when normal ac power has failed, and one contact,
                   closed when the standby generator is running. The generator running status shall be
                   retransmitted from the generator control panel.
                   Indicating lights shall be provided, one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the
                   normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency
                   source (red).




    ONWASA                                PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - INFLUENT PUMP STATION
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FAC1LITY                                          264001 7
    ARCADIS                                                                           Printed: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAOS. 0006
                Engine Exerciser - An engine generator-exercising timer shall be provided, including a
                selector switch to select exercise with or without load transfer. The exerciser shall be
                programmable to enable exercise for 1 minute to 24 hours per day in 1-minute
                increments for 1 to 7 days per week The exercising timer shall be equal to ASCO
                Accessory 1ICD.
                Surge Protective Device - Emergency side protection. The surge protective device shall
                be equal to ASCO Pulsar 450,
                Include provision for remote start-stop of the generator from the Owner's SCADA system.

      H.   Withstand and Closing Ratings
           t   The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short
               circuit current at the ATS terminals.
           2.   The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance
                with the standard's 1 1/2 and 3 cycle, long-time ratings.

           Service Representation
           1    The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of company-
                employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service
                center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 355 days
                a year.

PART 3 EXECUTiON

      A.   After installation, the system manufacturer's local dealer representative in the presence of the
           owner's engineer or designated appointee shall perform the following tests:
           1,   Prestart Checks
                     Inspect equipment to ensure that nothing was damaged during shipment or
                     installation.
                     Verify that the installation is in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines.
                     Check all fluid levels.
                     Verify all control and power wiring.

3.2   FUNCTIONAL TESTING

           Start engine, verify all operating parameters are within manufacturer's guidelines, verify phase
           rotation, and perform transfer to standby power.

           With unit in "automatic" simulate a power outage; verify proper operation and full operating
           sequence.

           Proper operation of controls, engine shutdown, and safety devices shall be demonstrated.

           Prior to acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall be subjected to a complete onsite
           acceptance test. The system shall be tested with full load and half load for a minimum of two
           hours each. Provide a resistive load bank for the test. The manufacturer's representative shall
           conduct the test, but shall coordinate the date with the Owner and Engineer in advance.

3.3   ORiENTATION

      A.   The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation for the
           owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include both classroom




PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM - NFLUENT PUMP STATION                                  ONWASA
264001 8                                         NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                        ARCADIS
                                                                       Project No. NcONWAQ8. D006
           and hands-on instruction. Topics covered shall include control operation, schematics, wiring
           diagrams, meters and indicators, warning lights, shutdown system and routine maintenance.

3.4   Completion

      A.   The Contractor shall fill generator fuel tanks to full capacity prior to turning them over to the
           Owner at substantial completion.


                                            END OF SECTION




ONIWASA                               PACKAGED ENG1NE GENERATOR SYSTEM -. INFLUENT PUMP STATION
NORThWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILLTY                                          2640 01 9
ARCADIS                                                                           Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                            SECTION 26 45 00

                       LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            1.   Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):
                 359-1, Special Colors.
           2.    Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
                       112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
                       519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric
                       Power Systems.
                       062.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
                      Circuits.
            3.   National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (N EMA):
                      CF 1 Shunt Capacitors.
                      MG 1, Motors and Generators.
                      250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
                      WC-57, Control Cables.
           4.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.

1.3   DEFINITIONS

      A.   Terms that may be used in this section:
               AFD: Adjustable frequency drive.
               CMOS: Complementary metal oxide semiconductor.
               CSI: Current Source Inverter.
               EMU: Energy monitoring unit.
               GTO: Gate Turn-Off Thyristor.
               MPR: Motor protection relay.
               MTBF: Mean time between failure
               PWM: Pulse width modulation.
               ROM: Read only memory.
               RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
               RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit.
               Rated Load: Load specified for the equipment.
               Rated Speed: Nominal rated (100 percent) speed specified for the equipment.
               TDD: Total demand distortion.
               THD: Total harmonic distortion.
               TIL: Transistor transistor logic.
                 VFD: Variable frequency drive. (VFD and AFD are used interchangeably                 in   the
                 documents)




ONWASA                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
NORThWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     2645 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NcoNwAoa. DDO6
1.4   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

      A.   Performance Requirements:
           1.   Composite drive/motor efficiency (CE) is defined as ratio of motor shaft kW to drive input
                kW. AFD system minimum composite efficiency requirements:
                    At 60-Hz drive output and 100 percent load, CE 92 percent.
                    At 50-Hz drive output and 60 percent load CE 89 percent.
                    At 40-Hz drive output and 30 percent load CE = 84 percent.
                    At 30Hz drive output and 12,5 percent load CE = 77 percent.
           2.   Rated Continuous Operation Capacity: Not less than 1.15 times full load current rating of
                driven motor, as indicated on the motor nameplates, and suitable for continuous
                operation at any continuous overload which may be imposed on motor by driven pump
                operating over specified speed range.
           3.   Basis for Harmonic Computations: Using Simplified Piant One-Line Diagram for current
                and voltage distortion computations, furnish harmonic filters, line reactors, isolation
                transformers, or higher pulse converter arrangements required to meet current/voltage
                distortion limits.
           4.   Normal Source Current Harmonic Distortion:
                a.   Compute normal source individual and total          current harmonic distortion in
                     accordance with IEEE Standard 519. Individual current harmonic distortion and the
                     total demand distortion expressed as percent of maximum demand load current (IL)
                     shall not exceed values soecified in Table 1 beLow:
                              Table 1
                                                                     Harmonic Current Distortion
                              Individual Harmonic Order              Percent of Max. Demand
                              (Odd Harmonics)                        Load Current 1L
                              h<11                                   4
                              llh<17                                 2
                              17h<23                                 1.5
                              23 h <35                               0.6
                              35h                                    0.3
                             Total Demand Distortion (TDD)            5
                b.  Limits specified in Table 1 are for drives utilizing 6-pulse rectifiers. Should
                    manufacturer propose 12-pulse rectifiers, limits for characteristic harmonics can be
                    increased bya factor of 1.41 times values listed in Table 1.
           5.   Standby Source Current Harmonic Distortion:
                a.  Compute standby source individual and total current harmonic distortion in
                    accordance with IEEE Standard 519. Individual current harmonic distortion and total
                    demand distortion expressed as percent of maximum demand load current IL shall
                    not exceed values soecified in Table 2 below.
                              Table 2
                                                                     Harmonic Current Distortion
                              Individual Harmonic Order              Percent of Max. Demand
                              (Odd Harmonics)                        Load Current L
                              h<11                                   4
                              11<h<17                                2
                              17<h<23                                1,5
                              23<h<35                                0.6
                              35<h                                   0.3
                              Total Demand Distortion (TDD)          5




LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM                                                 ONWASA
26 45 00 2                                             NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATIONI FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                             ARCADIS
                                                                             Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                b.   Limits specified in Table 2 are for drives utilizing 6-pulse rectifiers. Should
                     manufacturer propose 12-pulse rectifiers, limits for characteristic harmonics can be
                     increased by a factor of 1.41 times values listed in Table 2.
                Normal Source Voltage Harmonic Distortion: Compute normal source voltage harmonic
                distortion. THD shall not exceed 5 percent, and individual voltage harmonic distortion
                shall not exceed 3 percent.
                Standby Source Voltage Harmonic Distortion: Compute standby source voltage harmonic
                distortion. THD shall not exceed 5 percent, and individual voltage harmonic distortion
                shall not exceed 3 percent.
                Furnish isolating transformers or series reactors, harmonic filters, or other devices
                necessary for proper system operation. Furnish necessary devices and circuits to prevent
                operation of one drive from adversely affecting operation of other drives supplied from
                same transformer or same bus.
                When isolation transformers are used, design to meet K-factor requirements of drive(s)
                connected.

           Design Requirements:
                Design and provide drive system consisting of adjustable frequency controller, drive
                motor, certain auxiliary items, and components necessary for complete operating system.
                Other equipment is being powered from same bus as adjustable frequency drives.
                Ensure proper operation of drives and other loads under normal and emergency
                conditions.
                Furnish AFDs rated on basis of actual motor full load nameplate current rating.
                Drive System: Convert incoming three-phase, 60-Hz ac power to variable voltage,
                adjustable frequency output for adjustable speed operation of a standard ac induction
                squirrel-cage motor, using the pulse-width-modulation (PWM) technique to produce the
                adjustable frequency output.
                System rated for continuous industrial duty and suitable for use with Standard
                NEMA MG 1, Design B motors.
                Incoming Line Circuit Breaker: Provide positive means of disconnecting incoming power,
                and overcurrent protection for the drive system.
                Incoming Line Reactor: Design to minimize harmonic distortion on the incoming power
                feeder.
                All adjustable frequency drives provided shall include a Power Alert.
                     Provide universal power alert at each adjustable frequency drive to verify electrical
                     isolation. indication shall be on front of motor starter enclosure or door.
                     Device shall be wired to load side of starter disconnect/circuit breaker and indication
                     shall mount on front of starter in 30 mm knockout.
                C.   Device shall be UL listed and monitor any combination of the four inputs, Li, L2, L3,
                     and GND.
                     Rated Voltage: Single phase or three phase, 40-75OVAC.
                     Indicators: Flashing indication when voltage is present.
                     Provide ATC Diversified Electronic Universal Power Alert U PA-i 30.

1.5   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:
               Overall drive system operating data, including efficiencies, input currents, and power
               factors, at driven equipment actual load and rated system input voltage, at 0, 40, 60, 80,
               100, and 110 percent of rated speed.
               Individual and total harmonic content (voltage and current) reflected in system normal
               source supply at driven equipment actual load at 70 and 100 percent of rated speed at
               locations specified in Simplified Plant One-Line Diagram, and load conditions specified.



ONWASA                                                LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     2645 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                    Normal source system short-circuit available at drive shall be calculated from data
                    furnished in Supplements to this section. Use TDD and THD factors as defined in IEEE
                    Standard 519 to designate total harmonic content.
                    Individual and total current and voltage harmonic content reflected in STANDBY power
                    source, at locations specified in Supplements to this section, at driven equipment actual
                    load at 70 and 100 percent of rated speed determined by using actual size and
                    subtransient reactance of STANDBY system obtained from standby source manufacturer.
                    Use TDD and THD factors as defined in IEEE Standard 519 to designate total harmonic
                    content.
                    AFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time and pulse rate of rise, including
                    any justification for proposed deviation from specified values. Include motor
                    manufacturer's certification that motor insulation will withstand long-term overvoltages
                    caused at motor terminals due to specified output pulse data or any proposed deviation
                    from this data.
                    Data on the shelf life of"dc link" capacitor.
                    Complete system rating, including all nameplate data, continuous operation load
                    capability throughout speed range of 0 to 120 percent of rated speed.
                    Complete adjustable frequency controller rating coordinated with motor full load
                    nameplate current rating; list any controller special features being supplied.
                    Controller, reactor, harmonic filter, and isolating transformer (if applicable) dimensional
                    drawings; information on size and location of space for incoming and outgoing conduit.
                    Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure.
                    Should separate enclosures and equipment be necessary for filter elements provide
                    complete dimensional information including location of space for incoming and outgoing
                    conduit, weight, maximum heat loss, and minimum current carrying capacity and
                    recommended wire size for required interconnecting circuits.
                    Layout of controller face showing pushbuttons, switches, instruments, indicating lights,
                    etc.
                    Complete system-operating description.
                    Complete system schematic (elementary) wiring diagrams.
                    Complete system interconnection diagrams between controller, drive motor, and alt
                    related components or controls external to system, including wire numbers and terminal
                    board point identification.
                    One-line diagram of system, including component ratings.
                    Description of diagnostic features being provided.
                    Descriptive literature for all control devices such as relays, timers, etc.
                    Itemized bill-of-materials listing all system components.
                    Specific description of provisions, such as filtering and harmonic suppression, being
                    made to ensure proper system operation when system is supplied from standby engine
                    generator specified in these Documents.
                    Description of MPR being furnished or how these functions are accomplished within drive
                    system.
                    Description of Power Alert device to be mounted on the front face of each adjustable
                    frequency drive.

        3.    Informational Submittals:
                   Statement of Supplier qualifications.
                   Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
                   Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
                   Factory functional test reports.
                    Certified copy of test report for identical motor tested in accordance with NEMA MG
                    1-12.53a and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B, showing rated load, rated speed
                    efficiency meeting or exceeding specified values; motors not as specified will be rejected.



LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM                                                         ONWASA
2645 00 4                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                     ARCADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
           6.   Field test reports.
           7,   Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period of 5 years.
                Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and
                maintenance with current price information.
                List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and
                during startup and for future maintenance.
                Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
                Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 65 00,
                Equipment Testing and Facility Start-up.

1.6   QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Supplier: Minimum 5 years experience in furnishing similar size and type adjustable
           frequency, controlled speed, drive systems.

1.7   EXTRA MATERIALS

      A.   Furnish for each drive unit:
                Complete set of components likely to fail in normal service.
                Spare printed circuit boards.
                Spare Potentiometers.
                Integrated circuits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   SUPPLEMENTS

      A.   Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

2.2   SERVICE CONDITIONS

           Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F.

           Storage Temperature: Minus 40 to 158 degrees F.

           Humidity: 0 to 95 percent relative (non-condensing).

           Altitude: U to 1000 feet

           Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of maximum frequency.

2,3   COMPONENTS

      A.   Drive Units:
                Incorporate a switching power supply operating from a dc bus, to produce a PWM output
                waveform simulating a sine wave and providing power loss ride through of
                two milliseconds at full load, full speed.
                Current-limiting semiconductor fuses for protection of internal power semiconductors.
                Employ a diode bridge rectifier providing a constant displacement power factor of
                0.95 minimum at all operating speeds and loads.
                Use transistors for output section, providing a minimum of 97 percent drive efficiency at
                full speed, full load.




ONWASA                                                 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 45 00-5
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
              5.     Employ dc power discharge circuit so that fter removal of input power dc link capacitor
                     voltage level will decay below 50 volts dc within 1 minute after de-energizing following
                     NEMA CP I and NFPA 79. Design dc link capacitor for a MTBF of 5 years.
              6.     Operate with an open circuited output.
              7.     Input Voltage: 480V ac plus or minus 10 percent.
              8.     Output Voltage: 0 to 480 volts, three-phase, 0 to 66-Hz, minimum.
              9.     Maximum peak voltage of PWM AFD output pulse of 1,000 volts, with pulse rise time of
                     not  less than two microseconds, and a maximum rate of rise of 500 volts per
                     microsecond. Maximum frequency of PWM AFD output pulse (carrier) frequency
                     of 3,000-Hz. Should magnitudes of these characteristics be more stressful to motor
                     insulation than specified values, furnish insulation systems on the motors suitable for the
                     proposed values.
              10.    Motor Audible Noise Level: When operating throughout speed range of PWM AFD, no
                     more than 3 dBA above that designated in NEMA MG 1 for same motor operated at
                     constant speed with a 60-Hz supply voltage.
              11.    Short-Time Overload Capacity: 125 percent of rated load in RMS current for 1 minute
                     following full load, full speed operation.
              12.    Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: Suitable for connection to system with maximum source
                     three-phase, bolted fault, short-circuit available of 65,000 amps RMS         symmetrical
                     at480 volts.
              13.    Furnish drives with output current-limiting reactors mounted within equipment enclosure.
              14.    Diagnostics: Comprehensive for drive adjustment and troubleshooting:
                           Memory battery backup; 100-hour minimum during a power loss.
                           Status messages will not stop drive from running but will prevent it from starting.
                           Fault Condition Messages and History: First fault protection function to be activated,
                           ability to store six successive fault occurrences in order. Minimum faults numerically:
                                 Overcurrent (time and instantaneous).
                                 Overvoltage.
                                 Undervoltage (dc and ac).
                                 Overtemperature (drive, motor wiridings, motor bearing, pump bearing).
                                 Serial communication fault.
                                 Short-circuitlground fault (motor and drive).
                                 Motor stalled.
                                 Semiconductor fault.
                                 Microprocessor fault.                                                               Ti,
                                 Single-phase voltage condition.
               15.   Drive Protection:
                           Fast-acting semiconductor fuses.
                           Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip.
                           Dc uridervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout.
                           Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup.
                           Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link components.
                           Overtemperature, motor, and pump.
                           Single-phase protection.                                                                  -
                           Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset).
                     L     Active current limit/torque limit protection.
                           Semiconductor fault protection.
                           Short-circuit/ground fault protection.
                     I.    Serial communication fault protection.
                           Microprocessor fault.
                           Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule surge, tested per
                           IEEE C62.41).
                           Visual display of specific fault conditions.



LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM                                                       ONWASA
28 45 00 6                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
               16.   Operational Features:
                         Use manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
                         Sustained power loss.
                         Momentary power loss.
                         Power interruption.
                         Power loss ride through (0.1 second).
                         Start on the f]y.
                         Electronic motor overload protection.
                         Stall protection.
                         Slip compensation.
                         Automatic restart after power returns (ability to enable/disable function).
                           Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by 1.5-Hz steps in
                           10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system).
                     1.    Drive maintenance system software for complete programming and diagnostics.
                           Ground fault protection, drive, and motor.
                           Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.

               Rectifier: Three-phase. All stand-alone drives 6OHp and larger shall be three-phase, 18-pulse
               full wave diode bridge rectifier to provide a constant dc voltage to the drive's dc bus.
               Adjustable frequency drives located within a motor control center or wall mounted shall be 6-
               pulse drives.

               Furnish series choke and capacitors on dc bus to reduce ripple in rectifier output and to
               reduce harmonic distortion reflected into incoming power feeders.

               Controller: Microprocessor-controller PWM inverter to convert to dc voltage to variable
               voltage, adjustable frequency three-phase ac output. The output voltage shall vary
               proportionally with the frequency to maintain a constant ratio of volts to hertz up to 60-Hz.
               Above 60-Hz, the voltage shall remain constant, with the drive operating in a constant
               horsepower output mode.

               Enclosure:
                     NEMA 250, Type 1, gasketed, freestanding, enclosure for mounting against wall,
                     completely front accessible and hinged doors. Properly sized to dissipate heat generated
                     by controller within limits of specified operating conditions (including ambient temperature
                     and ambient airflow). Enclosure not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings.
                     Furnish drive complete with cable termination compartment door interlocked main circuit
                     breaker, defeatable (lockable in the open position), emergency stop pushbutton,
                     alphanumeric keypad and display, and operator's controls. Components and controls
                     specified in Section 26 10 05, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
                     Size forced-ventilation for periodic operation to cool each unit with maximum room
                     ambient temperature of 95 degrees F. Furnish redundant fans such that if one fan fails
                     remaining fans furnish adequate ventilation for the drive when operating at maximum
                     capacity. Furnish filters on ventilation intakes.
                     Bundle stranded copper wiring neatly with nylon tie wraps or with continuous plastic spiral
fl                   binding; label each terminal for permanent identification of leads; identify each wire at
                     each end with imprinted Mylar adhesive-back wire markers; incorporate in as-installed
                     wiring diagrams for wire and terminal numbers shown; wiring across door hinges use
                     19-strand, NEMA WC-57 Class C stranding looped for proper twist rather than bending at
                     hinge; wire connections internal to panels by crimp-on terminal types. For mu]tiple
                     enclosure systems, complete interconnection wiring with gasketed enclosure openings
                     for wiring; multipoint plug receptacles for any control wiring crossing equipment shipping
fl                   splits.



     ONJWASA                                                LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     264500-7
     ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
     Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
              5.    Selector switches, indicating lights, potentiometers, instruments, protective devices,
                    major system components, etc., identified by means of mechanically attached, engraved,
                    laminated nameplates.

        F.    Operator Interface:
                  Controls: Mount drive local control on front door of enclosure and include control switch
                  and membrane type keypad for the following operator functions:
                        Start (when in local mode).
                        Stop (when in local mode).
                        Speed increase (when in local mode).
                        Speed decrease (when in local mode).
                        Parameter mode selection (recall programmed parameters).
                        LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE control selection (in remote, furnish for remote RUN
                        command digital input and speed increase/decrease via remote 4 to 20 mA analog
                        signal).
                        Fault reset, manual for all faults (except loss of ac voltage which is automatic upon
                        return).
                        RUN/preset speed.
                        Parameter lock (password or key switch lockout of changes to parameters).
                        Start disable (key switch or programmed code).
              2.    Control circuit disconnect shall deenergize circuits in units that are not deenergized by
                    main power disconnect device.
              3.    120 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz circuits for control power and operator controls from
                    internal control power transformer. Furnish power for motor space heaters rated
                    120 volts. Where shown on control diagrams provide 120V power for seal water solenoid
                    valves, Temperature Protection Systems (TPS), and moisture monitoring relays.
              4.    Arrange component and circuit such that failure of any single component cannot cause
                    cascading failure(s) of any other component(s).
              5.    Alphanumeric Display: During normal operation and routine test, the following parameters
                    shall be available:
                          Motor current (percent of drive rated current).
                          Output frequency (Hertz).
                          Output voltage.
                          Running time.
                          Local/remote indicator.
                          Status of digital inputs and outputs.
                         Analog input and output values.
                          Output motor current per leg.
                         All test points.
              6.    Adjustable Parameters: Set drive operating parameters and, indicate in a numeric form.
                    Potentiometers may not be used for parameter adjustment. Minimum setup parameters
                    available:
                          Frequency range, minimum, maximum.
                         Adjustable acceleration/deceleration rate.
                         Volts per Hertz (field weakening point).
                         Active current limit/torque limit, 0 to 140 percent of drive rating.
                         Adjustable voltage boost (IR compensation).
                          Preset speed (adjustable, preset operating point).
                          Provision for adjustment of minimum and maximum pump speed to be furnished as
                         function of 4 to 20 mA remote speed signal.

        G.    Signal Interface: (Refer to control diagrams in the drawings for specific controls provided with
              each drive).



LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM                                                     ONWASA
26 45 00 - 8                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiLITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                For all drives provide the following Digital Input:
                     Accept a remote RUN command contact closure input.
                     High temperature contact closure input from field mounted motor temperature
                     monitoring relay
           2.   For all drives provide the following Digital Output: Furnish three discrete output dry
                contact closures rated 5 amps at 120 vo]ts ac.
                     DRIVE RUNNING.
                     DRIVE FAULT (with common contact closure for all fault conditions).
                     DRIVE IN REMOTE MODE.
           3    For all drives provide the following Analog Input: When LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is
                in REMOTE, control drive speed from a remote 4 to 20 mA dc signal. Make provisions for
                adjustment of minimum and maximum motor speed which shall result from this signal.
                Factory set this adjustment to comply with operating speed range designated in driven
                equipment specifications Frequency resolution shall be 0.1 percent of base speed.
           4.   For all drives provide the following Analog Output: Furnish two 4 to 20 mA dc signals, for
                actual frequency, actual load.

           Accessories:
           t    Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped
                equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.
                Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds
                Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer.

2.4   FACTORY FINISHING

      A.   Enclosure:
           1.  Primer: One coat of rust-inhibiting coating.
           2.  Finish:
                    Interior: One coat white enamel.
                    Exterior: One coat manufacturer's standard gray enamel orTIAJEIA 359-1, No. 61.
           3.  Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish.

25    SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

           Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection,
           and intended function.

           Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test control panels furnished

           Record test data for report.

      0.   Functional Test: Perform manufacturer's standard.
               Test diodes, transistors, and OTOs at a thermal level of 125 degrees C.
               Test TTL and CMOS chips at 70 degrees C.
               Test printed circuit boards while heat cycled to maximum temperature of 65 degrees C.
               Test run power sections at maximum 40 degrees C for 12 hours and run with motors for
               6 hours.
               Test assembled drive at maximum 40 degrees C and full load, full speed for4 hours.
               Test power capacitors and active components.
               Operate controller with motor throughout its specified range, and at rated power supply
               load for 1 hour.




ONWASA                                                LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 45 00-9
ARCADIS                                                                                    printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                                                                                                                  I.-



              8.    Resonance: When harmonic filters are furnished to meet specified harmonic distortion
                    requirements, perform analysis and furnish documentary evidence that filter elements do
                    not resonate with the remainder of system parameters at any of harmonic frequencies
                    present.

        E.    Motor Test: See Section 26 35 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motor.

              Provide "As-Built" Drawings for each adjustable frequency drive. As-Built Drawings provided
              shall incorporate any field changes required for the drives.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

        A     Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

        A.    Functional Test:
                  Conduct on each controLler.
                  Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections, interconnections, proper
                  installation, and quiet operation.
                    Vibration Test: Complete assembly, consisting of motor, load, and flexible shafting,
                    connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding
                    limits recommended by current edition of Hydraulic Institute Standards. Where loads and
                    drives are separated by intermediate flexible shafting, measure vibration both at top
                    motor bearing and at two points on top pump bearing, go degrees apart.
                    Record test data for report.

        B.    Performance Test:
              1.   Conduct on each controller.
              2.   Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
              3.   Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction.
              4.    Demonstrate performance by operating the continuous period while varying the
                    application load, as the input conditions allow, to verify system performance.
              5.    Record test data for report.
              6.    With plant load connected to normal utility source, measure the following to show
                    parameters within specified limits:
                    a.  Total and individual current harmonic distortion (up to and including 35th harmonic)
                         at each location identified as PCC in Simplified Plant One-Line Diagram, under
                         following load conditions:
                              AFDs running at full load and half load.
                               Half of the specified AFD5 running at full load and half load.
                    b.   Power factor at input side of each drive. Documented verification that power factor is
                         maintained at 95 percent as speed of drive goes down from 100 percent to
                         33 percent.
                    c.   THD at each location identified as PCC under follcwing conditions:
                             AFDs running at full load and half load.
                             Half of specified AFDs running at full load and half load.
              7.    With plant load connected to standby power source, measure the following to show
                    parameters within specified lim its:




LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM                                                       ONWASA
264500ID                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCON WADS. D006
                a.     Total and individual current harmonic distortion (up to and including 35th harmonic)
                       at each FCC location identified in Simplified Plant One-Line Diagram, with drives
                       running at:
                            Full load.
                            Half load.
                b.     THD at each FCC location identified in Simplified Plant One-Line Diagram, with
                       drives running at:
                            Full load,
                            Half load.

           Test Equipment:
                Use Dranetz, Model No. 626-PA, harmonic distortion monitor and Series 626 disturbance
                analyzer or equivalent instrument to document results.
                Provide diagnostic plug-in test card compJete with instructions, multiposition selector
                switch, and meters or built-in diagnostic control panel or ROM-based processor for
                monitoring ac, dc, and digital signals to assist in troubleshooting and startup of drive.

3.3   MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES

      A.   Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for
           minimum man-days listed below, travel time excluded:
               1 man-days for installation assistance and inspection.
                1    man-days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's
                Certificate of Proper Installation.
                1 man-days for prestartup classroom or Site training.
                1 man-days for facility startup.
                1 man-days for poststartup training of Owner's personnel. Training shall not commence
                until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by
                Owner.

      B.   See Section 01 40 00, Quality Control and Section 01 65 00, Start-up.

      C.   Provide files with all drive set up parameters. Provide a printed copy of these parameters with
           the technical submittal and with the final O&M manual.

3.4   SUPPLEMENTS

           The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification.

           Simplified Plant One-Line Diagram.


                                            END OF SECTION




ONIWASA                                                LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     2645 00il
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                                  SECTION 26 50 00

                                       SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)

     PART 1     GENERAL

     1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

           A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-
                 ditions (if included) and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

     1.2   SUMMARY

           A.    Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage power distribution and control equip-
                 ment.

-.   1.3   DEFINIT1ONS

           A.    ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

           B.    SPD(s): Surge Protective Device(s), both singular and plural.
T.
                 NEC; National Electrical Code.

                 Frequency Responsive Circuitry/Sine Wave Tracking (FRC/SWT): Voltage independent, dedi-
                 cated circuitry intended to mitigate the effects of switching or ringing surges that is specifically
                 designed so that it can survive the surge environment. The performance of FRC/SWT circUitry
                 is defined by the level to which it mitigates Ring Wave transients and can be demonstrated in
                 the test results of ANSI/IEEE C62.41 .2-2002, Category A Ring Wave (2kv).

                 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): A rating selected from a list of preferred values as detailed
                 in ANSI/UL 1449-2006 and assigned to each mode of protection. The value of VPR is deter-
                 mined as the nearest highest value taken from a list of preferred values as detailed in AN-
                 SI/UL 1449-2006 to the measured limiting voltage determined during the transient-voltage
                 surge suppression test using the combination wave generator at a setting of 6kV, 3kA.

                 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum designated root mean
                 square (rms) value of the power frequency voltage that may be continuously applied to the
                 mode of protection of an SPD.

                 Nominal Discharge Current (la): Peak value of the current, selected by the manufacturer from
                 a list of values specified iii ANSI/UL 1449-2006, through the SPD having a current wave
                 shape of 8/20 where the SPD remains functional after 15 surges using the test procedure de-
                 scribed in ANSI/UL 1449-2006.

                Type 2 SPD: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of the
                service equipment overcurrent device; including SPDs located at switchboards, motor control
                centers, distribution panelboards, and branch panelboards.

                Modes Of Protection; Electrical paths where the SPD offers defense against transient overvol-
                tages, e.g., each Line-to-Neutral (L-N), Line-to-Ground (L-G), Line-to-Line (L-L) and Neutral-
                to-Ground (N-G).



     ONWASA                                                                             SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACfL1TY                                                        26 5000 1
     ARCADIS                                                                                          Printed: 4.5.2011
     Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
        J.    Per Phase Ratings: 'Per-Phase' ratings for a three-phase Wye connected SPDs are deter-
              mined by multiplying the kA per mode times the number of dIscrete modes of protection (di-
              rectly connected suppression components), minus the value for the Neutral-to-Ground mode,
              divided by the number of phases.

                    Per-Phase    (((kA per mode) X (# of modes))-(N-G mode kA)) I (# of phases)

1.4     SHOP DRAWINGS

              Product Data: For each type of product indrcated, include all required testing and pertinent
              manufacturer information described herein section 1.6, rated capacities, maximum continuous
              operating voltage, weights and dimensions, electrical characteristics interconnecting wiring re-
              quirements, accessories, and ANSI/LJL 1449-2006 VPRs

              Letter from manufacturer stating products are in strict compliance with the recommendations
              of IEEE Std 1100-2005, Clause 8.6.1, and incorporate 10 individual dedicated discrete modes
              of protection for three-phase wye systems, including direct Line-to-Line components. Re-
              duced-Mode variations will not be accepted.

              Warranty duration and replacement policy

              Manufacturer's installation instructions

              Provide a table indicating which panel/switchboard/equipment each SPD will serve. Table
              shall include project name, panel name, voltage/phase, and SPD model number to be pro-
              vided. Submittals will not be approved without this table.



                    Panel/Switchboard Name               Volts, Phase              SPD Model Number




1.5     INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
                                 2TM2002 test reports. Include complete let-through voltage/measured limit-
        A.    IEEE Std C62.41
              ing voltage test data, test graphs and scope traces for each and every mode for each product
              submitted for Category's C, B, A (including Cat A, 2 kV, 67 A, 100 kHz ring wave at both 90 &
              270 degree electrical phase angles). Testing shall be conducted as follows:

        Test Parameters: Positive Polarity, Net voltages are peak (±10%). All tests are static (unpowered)
             except 150 V MCOV modes, Let-through voltages on static tests calculated by subtracting
             sine wave peak from let-through measured from zero. 150 V MCOV mode let-through voltages
             measured from the insertion point on the sine wave. Each phase is the average of the 3 mod-
             es. In order to duplicate the results, the specified mode shall be tested for all three phases
             (except N-G) and averaged together. (Individual mode or shot results may not vary by more
             than 10%. Scope Settings: Time Base = 10 microseconds, Samplmg Rate               250 Megasam-
             pies/sec. These settings assure Let-through voltages test results are accurate). All tests per-
             formed with 6" lead length (external to the enclosure), simulating actual installed performance
             per the ANSI/UL 1449-2006 standard.




SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES                                                                           ONWASA
26 50 00-2                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
      B.   Let-Through Voltages furnished within this tesbng shall not exceed the following to be consi-
           dered for approval, no exceptions.
                Service Entrance 120/208 V 3Ph Wye (IEEE Cat C High Current Driven Surge Test Re-
                sults) (L-N 915V) (L-L 1120V) (L-G 1030 V) (N-G 1180V).
                Service Entrance 277/480 V 3Ph Wye (IEEE Cat High Current Driven Surge Test Re-
                sults) (L-N 1050 V) (L-L 1345 V) (L-G 1270 V) (N-G 1575 V).
                Distribution 120/208 V 3Ph Wye (ANSI/UL 1449-2006 VPRs): (L-N 600 V) (L-G 600 V)
                (L-L 1200 V) (N-G 600 V) ANSI/IEEE C62 Cat. 83/Cl 6kV, 3kA.
                Distribution 277/480 V 3Ph Wye (ANSI/UL 1449-2006 VPRs): (L-N 1200 V) (L-G 1200 V)
                (L-L 2000 V) (N-G 1400 V) ANSI/IEEE C62 Cat. B3/C1 6kV, 3kA.
                Branch 120 V (IEEE Cat A Ring wave (2 kV)) Test Results (@270° phase angle)): (L-N
                40 V) (L-L 40 V) (L-G 60 V) (N-G 60 V),Branch 277 V (IEEE Cat A Ring wave (2 kV))
                Test Results (@270° phase angle)): (L-N 60 V) (L-L 130 V) (L-G 80 V) (N-G 60 V).

      C.   Certificates of Conformity: For SPDs from manufacturer certifying compliance with a NRTL
           listing/certification to the following standards:
                                                    3R0
                 ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449             Edition)
                 UL 1283 (Type 2 SPDs Only)
                 UL 96A (Service Entrance Only)

1.6   CLOSEOUT SLJBMITTALS

           Operation and Maintenance Data: For SPD to include operation, installation, warranty and
           specification data in closeout submittals.

           Certification: By Electrical Contractor (Installer), that installation complies with manufacturers
           instructions (SEE FINAL INSPECTION SECTION OF THIS SPECIFICATION).

           Warranty duration and replacement policy

1.7   QUALITY ASSURANCE - Shall comply with the following:

           ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.41.1TM2002, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage
           (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

           ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.42.lTM2002, iEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of
           Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 v and Less) AC Power Circuits

           ANSI/IEEE C62.45TM2002, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment
           Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

           ANSI 084.1, American National Standard for Electric Power Systems and Equipment - Vol-
           tage Ratings (60 Hertz)

           IEEE Standard 1100-2005, IEEE Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic
           Equipment - Clause 8.6.1

           National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 (NEC) 2011

      G,   ANSI/UL 1449-206 Surge Protective Devices (UL 1449 3Id Edition)




ONWASA                                                                          SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 50 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
           IEEE Std C62.72TM2007 - IEEE Guide for the Application of Surge Protective Devices for
           Low-Voltage (1000 V or Less) AC Power Circuits

           Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
           by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

           Listed to UL 1283 and UL 1449 3 Edition.

           Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
           by a NRTL testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

           Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have at least five years experience in the
           engineering, design and manufacture of permanently connected SPDs,

1.8   PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.   Rate SPDs for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
               Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not lass than 125 percent of nominal system
               operating voltage.
               Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).
               Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing.
               Altitude: Less than 20000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.

1.9   COORDINATION

           Coordinate location of field-mounted SPOs to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.

           SPDs shall be rated for the class and category of service necessary for the application per the
                                    TM                                TM
           ANSI/IEEE Std C62.41.2      -2002 and ANSIIIEEE C62.72        -2007 (Categories C, B, A)

1.10 WARRANTY

      A The manufacturer shall provide unlimited free replacement of the entire SPD (not just mod-
          ules, components or sub-assemblies) for all inoperable SPDs during the warranty period. Ac-
          ceptable manufacturers listed below that do not meet the warranty as standard shall submit a
           Fetter extending the warranty with the product submittal.
           1.   Warranty Period: Minimum warranty shall be Twenty-Five (25) years from date of Sub-
                stantial Completion.

      B.   Maintenance Restrictions: No SPD shall be supplied which requires scheduled preventative-
           maintenance or replaceable parts (other than replaceable LEIJs or batteries for diagnostic cir-
           cults). Units requiring functional testing, special test equipment, or special training to monitor
           SPD status are not acceptable. SPOs shall require no routine maintenance. SPDs are consi-
           dered non-repairable items and shall be fully replaced upon failure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2,1   FUSING

      A.   Provide as a minimum, overcurrent, over-temperature protection in the form of component-
           level thermal fusing to ensure safe failure and mitigate thermal runaway. This component-level




SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES                                                                        ONWASA
26 5000 .- 4                                            NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiLiTY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                               ARCADIS
                                                                              Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
                  fusing shall be an integral part of the MOV itself arid not wire or other material independently
                  laid across each MOV.

                  Provide integral short circuit current fusing with each device. The fusing will be independent of
                  the "component-level' fusing and specifically for overcurrent protection and shall be con-
                  structed utilizing surge rated, cartridge fuses and not rated 'silver-fuse-wire' or other material.

                  The use of any mechanical or electro-mechanica? thermal/overcurrent protection, i.e. moving
                  parts and/or springs and shutters, in combination with or for the protection of the suppression
                  elements are expressly prohibited and will be rejected.

                  Large-Block 34mm (5OkA) square Thermal Protected MOVs are expressly prohibited and will
                  riot be accepted.

                  The fusing mechanisms employed shall effectively coordinate their performance in conjunction
                  with the high current abnormal over-voltage testing under ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (a.k.a. UL 1449
                  3rd
                        Edition).

       2.2   SWITCHBOARD SUPPRESSORS

             A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specific model numbers
                  listed by one of the following only, no model # variations or substitutions are permitted:
                  1.     Surge Suppression Incorporated: 888-987-8877 (bkssurqesuppressioncorn)
                         (LSED3Y2 K-56 277/480) / (LSED3Y 1 K-56 120/208)
                  2.     Current Technology mc: 800-238-5000 (www.currenttechnoloqy.com)
                         (CGP100-2771480-3GY) (CGP100-120/208-3GY)
                  3.     Liebert Corporation: 614-888-0246 (wwwIiebert. corn)
                         (S1-025-480-ANSE) (S1-025-208Y-ANSE)

                  All SPDs on the project shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

                  Peak-Surge Current Shall be 240 kA per phase

                  Surge Protection Devices shall comply with the following:
                                                                            3td
                  1.  Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449       Edition, and matching or exceed-
                      ing the pan elboard short-circuit rating.
                  2,  UL 96A Listed
1-'.              3.  Individually fused metal-oxide Varistors.
                  4.  Cartridge fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
                  5.     Arrangement with wire connections to branch circuit breaker, neutral bus, and ground
                         bus.
                  6.  LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
                  7.  Permanently-mounted, parallel connected
                  8.  Bi-directional, thermal stress reducing, encapsulated, custom parallel and solid state cir-
                      cult configuration.
                  9.  Self Restoring, fully automatic
                  10. Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
                      SPD components that "crowbar" (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are prohibited.

             E.   SPDs shall be:
                  1.     Listed to ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449 3'c Edition) and complementary listed to UL
                         1283.




       ONWASA                                                                             SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
       NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                        26 50 00-5
       ARCADIS                                                                                          Printed: 4.5.2011
       Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                   SPDs shall be Type 1, Type 2, 3 & 4 not permitted.
                   SPDs shall have a Nominal Discharge Current of 20kA per mode for all modes.
                   The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage shall be as follows:

                   Nominal System Voltage                  Mode                           MCDV
                                                            L-N                           150V
                                                            L-L                           300V
                          120/2O8Wye                                                      150V
                                                            L-G
                                                            N-G                           150V
                                                            L-N                           320 V
                                                            L-L                           550V
                          277/480 Wye
                                                            L-G                           320 V
                                                            N-G                           320V

       F.    Protection modes and UL 1449 VFR's for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-
             wire circuits shall be as follows:
                  Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y1277 -600 V for 208Y1120 V.
                  Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y1277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                   Line to Line: 2000Vfor48OY/277- i200Vfor2O8Y/120V.
                   Neutral to Ground: 1400 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V.

2.3    MOTOR CONTROL CENTER SUPPRESSORS

       A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specific model numbers
             listed by one of the following only, no model # variations or substitutions are permitted:
                   Surge Suppression Incorporated: 888-987-8877 (bks(surqesuppression.com)
                   (SDLB3Y2K-56 277/480) / (SDLB3Y1K-56 120/208)
                   Current Technology Inc: 800-238-5000 (www.currenttechnoloqycom)
                   (CGP8O-277/480-3GY) (CG P80-i 201208-3GY)
                   Liebert Corporation: 614-888-0246 (www.Iiebert.com)
                   (Si-UI 6-480-ANSE) (S1-Oi 6-208Y-ANSE)

        B.   Al! SPDs on the project shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

       C.    Peak-Surge Current Shall be 160 kA per phase

        D.   Surge Protection Devices shall corn pl with the following:
                                                (3r
                 Listed toANSI/UL 1449-2006          Edition).
                                                                        3rd
                 Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449        Edition, and matching or exceed-
                 ing the panelboard short-circuit rating.
                 Individually fused metal-oxide Varistors.
                 Cartridge fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
                   Arrangement with wire connections to branch circuit breaker, neutral bus, and ground
                   bus.
                   LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
                   Permanently-mounted, parallel connected
                   Bi-directional, thermal stress reducing, encapsu!ated, custom parallel and solid state cir-
                   cult configuration.
                   Self Restoring, fully automatic
                   Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
                   SPD components that "crowbar" (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are prohibited.




SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES                                                                       ONWASA
2650 00 - 6                                               NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.201                                                                               ARCADIS
                                                                                     Projeet No. NCONWAO8. DOOS
       E.   SPDs shall:
                                                               3rd
                 Be Listed to ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449             Edition) and complementary listed to UL
                 1283.
                 Beiype2, Type 1,3 & 4 not permitted.
                 have a Nominal Discharge Current of 2UkA per mode far all modes.
                 have a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage shall be as follows:

                Nominal System Voltage                  Mode                           MCCV
                                                         L-N                           150V
                                                         L-L                           300V
                        120/2O8Wye
                                                         L-G                           150V
                                                        N-G                            150V
                                                         L-N                           320V
                                                         L-L                           550V
                        277/480 Wye
                                                         L-G                           320 V
                                                         N-G                           320V

       F.   Protection modes and UL 1449 VPRs for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-
            wire circuits shall be as follows:
                 Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 -600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                 Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 -600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                 Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 - 1200 V for 208Y/1 20V.
                 Neutral to Ground: 1400 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208W120 V.

       G.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specific model numbers
            listed by one of the following only, no model variations or substitutions are permitted:
                 Surge Suppression Incorporated: 888-987-8877 (bkssurciesuppression.com)
                 (LSED3Y2K-56 277/480) / (LSED3Y1K-56 1201208)
                 Current Technology Inc: 800-238-5000 (www.currenttechnolocw.com)
                 (CGP100-2771480-3GY) (CGP100-120/208-3GY)
                 Liebert Corporation: 614-888-0246 (www.liebert.com)
                 (S1-025-480-ANSE) (S1-025-208Y-ANSE)

       H.   All SPDs on the project shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

            Peak-Surge Current Shall be 240 kA per phase

       J.   Surge Protection Devices shall comply with the following:
                ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (3' Edition) Listed.
                Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449 3      Edition, and matching or exceed-
                ing the panelboard short-circuit rating.
                UL 96A Listed
                Individually fused metal-oxide Varistors.
                Cartridge fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
                 Arrangement with wire connections to branch circuit breaker, neutral bus, and ground
                 bus.
                 LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
                 Permanently-mounted, parallel connected.
                 Bi-directional, thermal stress reducing, encapsulated, custom parallel and solid state cir-
                 cuit configuration.
                 Self Restoring, fully automatic




ONWASA                                                                            SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLJkMATION FACiLITY                                                     265000-7
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5,2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. DUOS
              11.   Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
                    SPD components that 'crowbar' (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are prohibited.

        K.    SPDs shall be:
                    Listed to ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449 3          Edition) and complementary listed to UL
                    1283.
                    SPDs shall be Type 1, Type 2, 3 & 4 not permitted.
                    SPDs shall have a Nominal Discharge Current of 2OkA per mode for all modes.
                    The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage shall be as follows:

                    Nominal System Voltage                  Mode                           MCOV
                                                             L-N                           150V
                                                             L-L                           300V
                            120/208 Wye                      L-G                           150 V
                                                             N-G                           150V
                                                             L-N                           320V
                                                             L-L                           550V
                            277/480 Wye                                                    320V
                                                             L-G
                                                             N-G                           320V

                    Protection modes and UL 1449 VPRs for grounded wye circuits with 208Y!120 V, 3-
                    phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
                    Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                    Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 -600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                    Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 - 1200 V for 208Y/1 20V.
                    Neutral to Ground: 1400 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y1 120 V.

2.4     DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS (400A & ABOVE)

        A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specific model numbers
              listed by one of the following only, no model # variations or substitutions are permitted:
                    Surge Suppression Incorporated: 888-987-8877 (bkssurqesurpression.com)
                    (SDLB3Y2K-56 277/480) / (SDLB3Y1K-56 120/208)
                    Current Technology Inc: 800-238-5000 (www.currenttechnoloqy.com)
                    (CG P80-277/480-3GY) (CG P80-I 20/208-3GY)
                    Liebert Corporation: 614-888-0246 (www.Iiebert.com)
                    (S1-016-480-ANSE) (S1-016-208Y-ANSE)

        B.    All SPDs on the project shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

        C.    Peak-Surge Current Shall be 160 kA per phase

        0.    Surge Protection Devices shall compl' with the following:
                                                 (31
                  Listed to ANSLIUL 1449-2006         Edition).
                  Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449 3 Edition, and matching or exceed-
                  ing the panelboard short-circuit rating.
                  Individually fused metal-oxide Varistors.
                  Cartridge fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
                  Arrangement with wire connections to branch circuit breaker, neutral bus, and ground
                    bus.
                    LED indicator lights for power and protection status.




SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES                                                                            ONWASA
26 5000-8                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4,5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                Permanently-mounted, parallel connected
                Bi-directional, thermal stress reducing, encapsulated, custom parallel and solid state cir-
                cuit configuration.
                Self Restoring, fuuy automatic
                Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
                SF0 components that 'crowbar (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are prohibited.

      E.   SPDs shall:
                                                              31d
                Be Listed to ANSI/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449             Edition) and complementary listed to UL
                1283.
                Be Type 2, Type 1, 3 & 4 not permitted.
                Have a Nominal Discharge Current of 2DkA per mode for all modes.
                Have a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage shall be as follows:


               Nominal System Voltage                  Mode                           MCOV
                                                        L-N                           150V
                                                        L-L                           300 V
                     120/2O8Wye
                                                        L-G                           150V
                                                       N-S                            150V
                                                       L-N                            320V
                     277/480                           L-L                            550V
                               Wye                     L-G                            320V
                                                       N-S                            320V

                Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR's for grounded wye circuits with 208Y1120 V, 3-
                phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
                Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y1120 V.
                Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V
                Line to Line: 2000 Vfor480Yf277 -1200 Vfor2O8YIl2QV.
                Neutral to Ground: 1400 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y1120 V.

2.5   BRANCH PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS (BELOW 400A)

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specific model numbers
           listed by one of the following only, no model # variations or substitutions are permitted:
                 Surge Suppression Incorporated: 888-987-8877 (bks(surqesuppression.com)
                 (CKLA3Y2K-56 277/480)1 (CKLA3YIK-56 120/208)
                 Current Technology mc: 800-238-5000 (www.currenttechnoloqy.com)
                 (CG P60-277/480-3GY) (CG P60-i 20/208-3GY)
                 Liebert Corporation: 614-888-0246 (www.Iiebert.com)
                 (S1-016-480-ANSE) (S1-016-208Y-ANSE)

      B.   All SPDs on the project shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

      C.   Peak-Surge Current Shall be 120 kA per phase

      D.   Surge Protection Devices shall compw with the following:
               Listed to ANSI/UL 1449-2006(3 ° Edition).
               Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449 3rd Edition, and matching or exceed-
               ing the panelboard short-circuit rating.




ONWASA                                                                           SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILiTY                                                     26 50 00-9
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NcONWAO8. 0006
                    Shall not exceed the let-through voltage requirements required in section 1.5.B of this
                    specification for Branch Panel location devices. This definition is also found in section
                    1.3.E
                    Individually fused metal-oxide Varistors.
                    Cartridge fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
                    Arrangement with wire connections to branch circuit breaker, neutral bus, and ground
                    bus.
                    LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
                    Permanently-mounted, parallel connection.
                    Bi-directional, thermal stress reducing, encapsulated, custom parallel and solid state cfr-
                    cuit configuration.
                    Self Restoring, fully automatic
                    Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
                    SPD components that "crowbar (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are prohibited.

        E.    SPDs shall:
                 Be Listed to ANSF/UL 1449-2006 (UL 1449 3 Edition) and complementary Fisted to UL
                  1283.
                  Be Type 2, Type 1,3 &4 not permitted.
                  Have a Nominal Discharge Current of 1 OkA per mode for all modes.
                  Have a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage shall be as follows:


                    Nominal System Voltage                 Mode                          MCOV
                                                             L-N                         150V
                                                             L-L                         300 V
                            1201208 Wye                                                  150V
                                                             L-G
                                                            N-G                          150V
                                                            L-N                          320 V
                                                            L-L                          550 V
                            2771480 Wye
                                                             L-G                         320 V
                                                            N-G                          320V

                    Protection modes and UL l449 VPR's for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-
                    phase, 4-wire circuits shall not exceed:
                    Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y1277 -600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                    Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y1277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V.
                    Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 - 1200 V for 208Y!1 20V.
                    Neutral to Ground: 1400 V for 480Y/277 - 600 V for 208Y/120 V.

2.6     ENCLOSURES                                                                                                 -

        A.    All Enclosures: NEMA Type 4.

PART 3 EXECUTION                                                                                                       1




3.1     INSTALLATION

              Install SPDs in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the NEC.                          I




              Install SPDs at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance
              ground.




SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES                                                                         ONWASA
2650 00-10                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4,5,2011                                                                                      ARCAD1S
                                                                                      Project No. NCONWAOB. 0006
           Install SPDs with conductors between SPD and the branch circuit breaker as short and
           straight as possible. When possible do not exceed manufacturers recommended lead length.
           In the case where the lead length exceeds 18 inches, the installer shall contact the SPD man-
           ufacturer for installation assistance.

           Install the SPDs immediately adjacent to the switchboard or panelboard being protected.

           SPDs shall be installed to a disconnect switch or breaker rated for a minimum of 30.-amps per
           manufacturers installation instructions to ensure a means of disconnecting the SPD from
           power without deenergizing the panel or the connected loads. The use of direct bus bar con-
           nected SPDs is expressly prohibited and will be rejected.

           Do not energize service entrance equipment or panelboards until SPDs are properly installed
           and connected.

           Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPDs
           installed. Disconnect all SPDs (all Phase, Neutral and Ground connections) before conducting
           insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.

3.2   HELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Field Service: Electrical Contractor shall inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies,
           and equipment installations, including connections to strictly comply with this specification.
                Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturers written installation
                requirements and NEC requirements
                After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
                compliance with requirements.
                Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions, if applicable.

      B.   The SPD installation shall be inspected and certified by a factory-trained representative of the
           SPD manufacturer. In completing this start-up, the factory-trained inspector shall furnish the
            Engineer with a documentation stating that all SPDs are the correct specified model numbers,
           in the correct locations and equipment designations and installed in strict accordance with the
           intent of this specification and the requirements of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall
           make the manufacturer aware of the available dates to perform this inspection and shall give
           at least 45 days notice of the required deadline date. The cost for this service shall be in-
           cluded in the package price of the SPD device and is to be part of the construction bid pack-
           age. The inspection shaH include one on-site visit and inspection accompanied by the docu-
           mentation as stated above. Subsequent visits and costs to correct problems created by the in-
           staller and not in accordance with the intent of the requirements of this specification and the
           installation instructions furnished by the manufacturer as noted in the documentation will be
           the responsibility of the Contractor.

                                               END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                         SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 50 00-11
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
TE-US PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                            SECTION 26 55 00

                                      LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and genera] provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.   The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
           1.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (1EEE):
                      C37.13, Standard For Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.
                     037.16, Switchgear, Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
                     Protectors,  Preferred   Ratings,    Related    Requirements,   and   Application
                     Recommendations.
                     C37.20.1, Metal-Clad Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.
                     037.20.3, Metal Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
                     C37.50, SwitchgearLow-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
                     Test Procedures
                     C37.100, Standard Definitions for Power Switchgear, Supplement C37.100B.
           2.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical
                Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
                National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
                     489,   Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker
                     Enclosures.
                     1025, Standard for Safety Electric Air Heaters.
                     1558, Standard for Safety Metal-Enclosed, Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
                     Switchgear.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:
                Descriptive product information.
                Itemized Bill of Material.
                Dimensional drawings.
                Operational description.
                Anchoring instructions and details.
                One-line, three-line, and control schematic drawings.
                Connection and interconnection drawings.
                Circuit Breakers - Copies of time-current characteristics.
                Ground Fault Protection: Relay time-current characteristics.
                Bus data,
                Incoming line section equipment data.
                Transformer section equipment data.
                Conduit entrance locations.

      S.   Informational Submittals:
                Manufacturer's installation instructions.
                Certified Factory Test Report.

ONWASA                                                                         LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCNGEAR
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 55 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                    Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified            in   Section 01430, Operation and
                    Maintenance Data.
                    Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Section 01650, Start-up.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.     Authority Naving Jurisdiction (AHJ):
                   Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where
                    required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
                    recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to
                    provide a basis for approval under NEC.
                    Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
                    Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shalt conform to those standards and shall have an
                    applied UL listing mark.

1.5      EXTRA MATERIALS

        A.     Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage and deliver prior to 90 percent Project
               completion the following spare parts:
                   Power and Control Fuses: One complete set.
                   Indicating Lights: One complete set.
                   Paint: One pint, to match enclosure exterior finish in color and quality.
                   Indicating Lamp Pullers: Two each.
                   Indicating Lamp Resistors and Sockets: Two each.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1     GENERAL

        A.     Service: 48Ovolts, three-phase, four-wire grounded wye, having an available short circuit
               current at line terminals of 100000 amperes or 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, as shown
               on drawings.

        B.     Designed and assembled in accordance with IEEE C37.20.3, IEEE C37.100, IEEE C37.50,
               and UL 1558.

        C.    Switchgear and its major components shall be end products of one manufacturer in order to
              achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts
              replacement, and manufacturer's services.

        D.    Operating Conditions:
                  Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C.
                  Equipment shall be fully rated without derating for operating conditions.

        E.     Lifting lugs on all equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

        F.    Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in
              Section 05 50 10, Anchor Bolts and Anchors. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
              Painting and Coating.




LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR                                                                            ONWASA
26 55 00-2                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FAcILIrY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAOS. [006
2.2   STATIONARY STRUCTURE

      A.   Type: IEEE C37.50 switchgear construction, consisting of pull section with cable terminations
           if required, metering, breaker, transition, and auxiliary sections assembled to form a rigid, self-
           supporting, metal enclosed structure.

      B.   Material: 11-gauge minimum cold-rolled steel, formed with reinforced steel members.

      C.   Grounded metal barriers         between     each    breaker,   main    bus,    branch    cabling,    and
           instrumentation/control.

      D.   Modular-designed steel frame with removable plates and individual, bolted, steel-framed
           vertical sections.

      E.   Individual, hinged doors over each breaker, metering, and auxiliary compartments.

      F.   Cable Installation and Termination Compartments:
               Rear hinged doors, capable of being bolted closed.
               Cable bending space in accordance with NFPA 70.
               Cable supports in each vertical section.

      G.   Breaker Compartments:
           1.  Individual, grounded compartments, with:
                     Sheet steel, top, bottom, sides, and ventilated compartment door with padlocking
                     features.
                     Flame retardant, arc track resistant nonmetallic rear barrier.
                     Drawout rails, stationary breaker contacts, interlocks, and necessary control and
                     indicating devices.
                     Shutters over all stationary contacts when breaker is               in   either TEST or full
                     DISCONNECT position.
                     Padlocking provision on rackout rails far locking breaker in either TEST or
                    DISCONNECT position.
           2.   Drawout Mechanism:
                    Shall retain removable element in connected position.
                    Mechanical interlocks to insure breaker is open before moved from any position, or
                    when between positions.
                     Four Distinct Breaker Positions: CONNECTED, TEST, DISCONNECTED, and
                     WITHDRAW.
                     Indicators to display breaker position.
                     Capable of being operated without opening breaker door.
           3.   Breaker frame grounded to steel frame throughout travel of drawout mechanism.
           4.   Each compartment designed for specific breaker frame size.
           5.   Future breaker compartments fully equipped with all electrical connections, bolted metal
                barrier across compartment face, and compartment door.

      H.   Slide-Out Instrument Tray:
                Mount above associated breaker.
                Accessible from front of Switchgear.
                For all control circuitry, breaker close and trip fuses, indicating lights.

2.3   ENCLOSURE

      A.   Finish: Baked enamel applied over a rust-inhibiting, phosphated base coating.
           1.   Color:
                a.   Exterior: Provide gray finish as approved by Engineer.
ONWASA                                                                               LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                           2655 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                             Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NcONWAO8. D006
                        Interior: White.
                        Unpainted Parts: Plated for corrosion resistance.

        B.    Indoor EncLosure:
              1.    NEMA 250, Type 1, with formed edges on hinged and non-hinged panels.
              2.    Rear, full-height, bolt-on panels for each enclosure section.
              3,    Cable Termination Access: Padlock provision


2.4     BUSWORK

        A.    Material: Phase isolated and insulated copper throughout entire length of sufficient cross
              section to limit temperature rise at rated current to 55 degrees C.

              Bus Arrangement: A-B-C, left-to-right, top-to-bottom, and front-to-rear, as viewed from front.

              Brace for short circuit currents 65000 amperes or 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical as
              indicated on drawings.

              Main Horizontal Bus: Non-tapered, continuous current rating as shown

              Ground Bus:
              t
              2.
                  Material: Copper.
                  Rating: 800 amperes minimum
              3.  Bolted to each vertical section.
              4.  Ground lug for 4/0 copper conductor on each end of bus.
              5.  Bus Connections and Joints: Bo]ted.

        F.    Extend each bus entire length of switchgear with provision for extension to future units.

2.5     PROTECTIVE DEVICES

        A.    Power Air Circuit Breakers:
              1.  Main Tie and feeder breakers in accordance with IEEE C37.13 and IEEE C37.16.
              2. Arrangement: Fully rated main and branch feeder circuit breakers.
              3. Three-pole electrically and mechanically trip-free with:
                       Self-aligning primary and secondary contacts.
                       Integral, solid state, over-current trip programmer.
                       Arc quenchers.
                       Closing Mechanism: Electrical.
                       Stored energy mechanism with maximum five-cycle closing.
                       Solid-state trip device.
              4. Individually mounted, drawout breaker listed for 100 percent continuous ampere rating.
              5.  Frame Size: as shown amperes.
              6.  Interrupting Rating: 65000 amperes or 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480 volts,
                 as shown on drawings.

        B.    MechanIcal Operation:
                  Front mounted, spring charging handle.
                  Mechanical closing escutcheon mounted pushbutton.
                  Mechanical trip, escutcheon mounted, trip pushbutton handle.

        C.    Electrical Operation:
              1.   Motor or solenoid automatic charging, plus manual charging.

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR                                                                             ONWASA
2655 00-4                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                Electrically closing, escutcheon mounted pushbutton with mechanical closing upon ross
                of control power.
                Electrical trip, escutcheon mounted, trip pushbutton.
                Control Power Voltage: 120 ac.

      0.   Color-Coded Visual Indicators: Contacts OPEN and CLOSED, plus mechanism CHARGED
           and DISCHARGED.

      E.   Accessories:
               Slow breaker closing handle for contact adjustments.
               Breaker lifting hoist and travel rail on top of switchg ear.
               Auxiliary a/b contacts on main, tie, and feeder breakers.

           Test Facilities:
                Breakers with integral external test points for portable test kit.
                Hand held test kit for functional testing of trip circuitry of each breaker.
                Separately mounted panel to test ground fault by tripping breaker.

      G.   Solid State Trip Units: Flux-shift trip and current sensors.
                Protective Programmers:
                a.   Self-powered, automatic RMS sensing micro-electronic processor.
                b.   No external relays or accessories,
                c.   Printed circuit cards with gold-plated contacts.
                d.   Programmable Controls:
                           Fixed-point, with repetitive accuracy and precise unit settings.
                          Trip adjustments made by non-removable, discrete step switching.
                e.   Field-lnstallable Rating Plugs:
                           Long-time pickup LED indicator and test receptacle.
                          Matching load and cable requirements.
                           Interlocked with tripping mechanism.
                           Breaker to remain trip-free with plug removed.
                           Keyed rating plugs to prevent incorrect application.
                f.   Long-time pickup light.
                g.   Selective coordination time/current curve shaping adjustable functions:
                          Current setting.
                          Long-time pickup.
                          Long-time delay.
                          Instantaneous pickup with short-time for main and feeders.
                          Short-time pickup for main and feeders.
                          Short-time delay for main and feeders with 12T function, and N-OUT switch]
                           Ground fault pickup.
                          Ground fault delay with 121 function.
                h.   Fixed, instantaneous pickup for main and feeders.
                i.   Fault Trip Indicators: Mechanical push-to-reset type for overload and short circuit
                    overload plus ground fault trip.
                j.  Rejection Pins: For each programmer frame size.
           2.   Phase Current Sensors:
                    Multiratlo type.
                    Fixed, mounted on breaker frame.
                    Molded epoxy construction.
                    One toroidaj type for each phase.
           3.   Ground Fault Sensor:
                    Neutral bar sing Fe-ratio CT mounted in cable compartment.
                    Molded epoxy construction.
                    Shorting bar.

ONWASA                                                                              LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      26 55 00-5
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed; 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
2.6    CONTROL WIRING

       A.     NFPA 70, Type 515, single-conductor, Class B, stranded copper, rated 600 volts for control,
              instrumentation, and power/current circuits.

              Shielded cable rated 600 volts for transducer output and analog circuits.

              Enclosed in top and vertical steel wiring troughs, and front-to-rear in nonmetallic wiring
              troughs.

              Conductor Lugs: Preinsu?ated, self-locking, spade type, with reinforced sleeves,

              Identification: individually, with permanent wire markers at each end.

              Spices: Not permitted in switchgear wiring.

2.7     TERMINAL BLOCKS

              Enclosed iii steel wiring troughs.

              Rated 600 volts, 30 amperes minimum, one-piece barrier type with strap screws.

              Shorting type for current transformer leads.

              Provide terminal blocks for:
              1.  Conductors connecting to circuits external to switchgear.
              2    Internal circuits crossing shipping splits.
              3.   Equipment parts requiring replacement and maintenance.

              Spare Terminals: Not less than 20 percent.

              Group terminal blocks for external circuit wiring leads.

              Maintain 6-inch minimum space between columns of terminal blocks.

        1+    Identification: Permanent, for each terminal and columns of terminals blocks.

        I.    Manufacturer: General Electric; Type EB-5, or equal.

2.8     TEST FACILITIES

              Breakers with integral external test points for portable test kit.

              Hand held test kit for functional testing of trip circuitry of each breaker.

              Separately mounted panel to test ground fault by tripping breaker.

2.9     iNSTRUMENTATION AND METERING

        A.    Potential Transformers:
                  Type: Molded.
                    Accuracy Classification: 0.3 at burden imposed by meters and instruments, including
                    future.
                    Primary Fuses: Two, current limiting.

LOW-VOLTAGE SWTCHG EAR                                                                               ONWASA
26 55 00-6                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLMATI0N FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAOS. 0006
           4.      Secondary Fuses: One, current limiting.

           Current Transformers:
               Type: Molded donut.
               Accuracy: 0.6 at burden imposed by meters and instruments.
           3   Shorting type terminal boards for current transformer leads.

2.10 POWER METER

           Electric power meter shall provide continuous monitoring of a three phase system. Meter shall
           measure current, voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, power factor and frequency.

           Meter shall be panel mount design with integrated display. Display shall be a Liquid Crystal
           Display (LCD), minimum 40-character display capable of clearly displaying alphanumeric
           characters. Meter shall be programmable for keypad.

           Meter shall be able to provide demand metering for energy and power. Demand shall be
           programmable for Thermal or Rolling demand with the demand interval of 5-60 minutes in step
           of 1.

           Direct voltage input up to 600 volts ac.

           Current input via current transformer with 5-ampere secondary.

           Programmable current and potential transformer ratios.

      C.   Programmable limits to activate up to four alarms.

      H.   Selectable Voltage Measurements: Line-to-line or tine-to-neutral and wye or delta.

           Meter shall provide a true RMS monitoring of a, Ib, Ic, ri, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca,
           voltage/current unbalance, power factor, line frequency, watts, vars, VA, Wh, varh, VAh,
           and demand readings for A, W, vars, and VA. Maximum and minimum values of measured
           quantities shall also be recorded and date/time stamped

           Display:
                   Volts, three-phase.
                   Amperes, three-phase.
                   Kilowatts.
                   Kilowatt-hours.
                    kW Demand with programmable period intervals.
                   kVA Demand.
                   Current Demand.
                    kVA.
                    kVAR.
                   kVARh.
                   Current THD.
                   Voltage THD.

           Voltage Rating: 95 to 135 ac.

     L.    Communications: Ethernet capability. Meter shall be able to communicate to plant SCADA
           system through the use of Ethernet using TCP/IP. The Ethernet module shall support both


ONWASA                                                                         LOWVOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   26 55 00-7
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
              lOBaseT (copper) and lOBaseF (fiber optic) connections. Meter shall not require any
              proprietary software for monitoring and communicating with plant SCADA system.

        M.    Manufacturers:
              1. General Electric, PQM II, or equal.

2.11    EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

        A.    Master Nameplate:
                  Deep-etched aluminum with manufacturer's name and model number.
                  Riveted to main vertical section.

        B.    Section Identification:
                   Stamped metaHic, riveted to each vertical section.
                   Serial number, bus rating, and section reference number.
                   Size: Manufacturer's standard.

        C.    Nameplate:
                 Engraved, phenolic for each circuit breaker cubicle and door mounted device.
                 White with black block type characters.
                 Character Height: 1/4-inch.
                 Size: Manufacturer's standard.
                 Inscriptions: As shown on one-line diagram.
                 Blank plates for future spaces.
                 Attachment Screws: Stainless steel pan head.

        D.    Cubicle Labels:
              1,  Nonmetallic, applied inside each cubicle compartment.
              2.   Device serial number, rating, and description.
              3.  Size: As required.

        E.    Metering Instruments: Meter type identified on meter face below pointer or dial.

        F.    Control Switches: Deepetched, aluminum escutcheon plate.

        G.    Relays and Devices:
                  Stamped metallic, riveted to instrument case.
                  Manufacturer's name, model number, relay type, and rating data.

        H.    Switchgear Signs:
                   Two signs each on front and back of switchgear.
                   Size: Manufacturer's standard.
                   Engraved, phenolic.
                   Color: Red with white.
                   Inscription: DANGER/HIGH VOLTAGE/KEEP OUT.
                   Characters: Gothic type, 2 inches high.
                   Attachment: Four rivets each sign.

2.12 KEY INTERLOCKS

              Mechanical lock cylinder, located in main and tie breaker compartments.

              Key and Lock Cylinder Type: Kirk.



LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCIHGEAR                                                                           ONWASA
26 5500-8                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAOB. D006
           Keys to be captive when breakers are closed.

           Two main and two tie breaker arrangements.

           Two keys available for each group of three locks.

2.13 FACTORYTESTING

      A.   in accordance with IEEE 037.20.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   INSTALLATION

           Lnstall equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

           Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts.

           Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.

      0.   Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders.

3.2   MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

      A.   Furnish manufacturer's representative: for the following services at Job Site or classroom as
           designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
                1 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.
                1 person-days for functional and performance testing.
                1 person-days for prestartup classroom or Job Site training.
                1 person-days for plant startup.
                1 person-days for post-start up training.

      B.   Furnish startup services and training of Owner's personnel at such times as requested by
           Owner.

      C.   Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.



                                            END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                          LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCI-IGEAR
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  26 55 00 9
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                             SECTION 26 60 00

                                LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section.

1.2    REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:
            1.  American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 02, National Electrical Safet' Code
                 (NESC),
           2.    National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Recommended Practice for
                 Installing Motor Control Centers (ANSI).
            3.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                 a     AB1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker
                       Enclosures
                 b.    ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements.
                 C.    ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays
                       Rated 600 Volts.
                       ICS 2.3, Industrial Control and Systems: Instructions for Handling, Installation,
                       Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers.
                       ICS 18, Motor Control Centers.
                       KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
                      Maximum),
                      250, Enclosures for ElectricaJ Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).
           4.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC)
           5.    Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
                      0098, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
                      489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
                      845, Motor Control Centers.

1.3   DEFINITIONS

           CT: Current Transformer.

           LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

           N.C.: Normally Closed.

           NO.: Normally Open.

           THD: Total Harmonic Distortion.

           VT: Voltage Transformer.

1.4   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:

ONWASA                                                              LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   266000 -.1
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D00
             1.   Itemized bill of material.
             2.   Descriptive information.
             3.   Dimensional drawings
             4.   Front Panel Elevations.
             5.   Conduit entrance locations.
             6.   Bus data.
             7.   Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics.
             8.   Typed tabulation:
                       Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings.
                       Motor horsepower.
                       Nameplate full load current.
                       Measured load current and voltage.
                       Heater model number and relay setting
                       Protective device trip settings.
                  9.   Manufacturer's solid-state starter switch or dip switch or program settings.
                  h.   Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter manufacturers overload
                       heater or setting selection tables for starters provided.
             9.  Control diagrams.
             10. Oneline diagrams.
             11. Schematic (elementary) diagrams.
             12. Outline diagrams.
             13 Catalog cut sheets on the proposed        Power Alert device installed. 14. Interconnection
                 diagrams.
             14. Anchoring instructions and details.

       B.    Informational Submittals:
                  Manufacturer's installation instructions.
                  Factory test reports, certified.
                  Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 70 00 - Contract Closeout

1.5    QUALITY ASSURANCE

       A.    Provide products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories that conform to UL
             Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark.

1.6    DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

       A.    Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to final installation
             location within building.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1    GENERAL

             Like Items of Equipment: End product of one manufacturer and] same manufacturer as low
             voltage switchboard and panelboards for standardization.

             Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, motor starters, branch
             circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to accommodate motors actually
             provided under this Contract.

             Controllers: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA CS 2, Class A.




LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER                                                                  ONWASA
26 60 00-2                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILIIY
Prted; 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No, NCONWAO8. 0006
            Control Transformer:
                Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit.
                Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit.
                One fuse in secondary circuit.
                Mount within starter unit.

            Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

            Lifting lugs on all equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

            Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in
            Section 05 50 10 - Anchor Bolts and Anchors.

            Operating Conditions:

            Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C.

            Altitude: 1000 above sea level.

            Equipment to be fully rated.

            Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250

       M    Equipment Finish:
                Electrocoating process applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base coating.
                Exterior Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2.2    SEPARATELY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL

       A.   Manually Operated Starter, Fractional Horsepower:
               Rating: 16 amperes continuous at 277 volts maximum.
               Single-phase, non-reversing, full voltage with overload protection.
               Enclosure: As shown.
               Handle guard/lock-off attachment.

       B.   Manually Operated Starter, Integral Horsepower:
                 Rating: Horsepower rated to maximum of 10 horsepower at 600 volts with overload
                 protection.
                 Single- or three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage.
                 Control: As shown.
                 Enclosure: As shown.
                 Locking in OFF position.
                 Two spare auxiliary, field-changeable contacts.

      C.    Combination Full-Voltage, Magnetic Starter:
               Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 65,000 amperes at 480-volts short
               circuit capacity with overload protection.
               Three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage.
               Control: As shown.
               Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector
               Enclosure: As shown.
               Pad lockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.




ONWASA                                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 60 00-3
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NGONWAO8. DUOS
     ft   Combination Two-Speed Motor, Magnetic Starter:
               Rating: Hp rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 65000 amperes at 480-volts short circuit
               capacity with overload protection.
               Three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage.
               Control: As shown
               Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector.
               Suitable for two-speed, two winding motors.
               Enclosure: As shown.
               Padlockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

     E.   Combination Reversing, Magnetic Starter:
             Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 65,000 amperes at 480-volts short
             circuit capacity with overload protection.
             Three-phase, reversing, full voltage.
             Control: As shown.
             Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector.
             Suitable for squirrel cage motors
             Enclosure: As shown.
             Pad lockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

     F.   Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter:
                Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts with overload protection.
               Three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage.
                Control: As shown
                Enclosure: As shown.
                Padlockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

     G.   Two-Speed, Magnetic Starter:
              Rating: 1-lorsepower rated at 600 volts with overload protection.
              Three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage.
              Control: As shown.
              Suitable for two-speed, two winding motors.
              Enclosure: As shown.
              Pad lockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

     H.   Reversing, Magnetic Starter:
              Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled with overload protection.
             Three-phase, reversing, full voltage.
              Control: As shown.
              Suitable for squirrel cage motors.
              Enclosure: As shown.
              Pad lockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

          Thermal Motor Overload Protection:
              Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
               Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated melting alloy, ratchet
               principle type element.
               Relay Trip: Standard, Class 20,
               Manualreset.
               Provide in each ungrounded phase.
               Mount within starter unit.

     J.   Solid State Motor Overload Protection:
          1.   Inverse-time-limit characteristic.


LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER                                                              ONWASA
26 60 00                                              NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Pr[nted: 4.5.2011                                                                             ARCADIS
                                                                            Project No. NCONWAQB. 0006
                  Phase loss, phase unbalanced and Class II ground fault protection.
                  Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
                  Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
                  NO. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
                  Manual reset.
                  Provide in each ungrounded phase.
                  Mount within starter unit.

2.3   MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

      A.   General:
               In accordance with NEMA lOS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA CS 18, and tJL 845.
               Voltage Rating: As shown.
                  Short Circuit Rating: 100000 amperes or 65000 amperes RMS symmetrical, as noted on
                  drawings, at 480 volts for entire motor control center as a complete assembly.
                  Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and other devices to be
                  front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise noted.
                  NEMA ICS 18, Part 3.
                       Class: I.
                       Type: B.
                       Provide blank spaces on interconnection diagrams to add control conductor code
                       designations during installation of equipment.

           Enclosure:
           1.  Type: NEMA 250 Type 1, indoor.
           2.  Vertical Section Standard Indoor Dimensions for NEMA 1               Type: 90 inches high,
               20 inches wide, 21 inches deep, nominal. Alternative width dimensions of 24 inches and
               30 inches are acceptable for oversize devices or panels. Do not exceed space shown.
           3.  Construction:
                    Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons.
                    Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without bolts, nuts, or cover
                    plates causing interference.
                    Removable top cover plates and bottom cover plates.
                     Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension.
           4.  Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting angles.
           5.  Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top and bottom.
           6.  Vertical Wiring Compartment: Full height, isolated from unit starters with separate hinged
               door and tie supports. No terminal blocks allowed in vertical wireway compartment.
           7.  Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers for each starter,
               feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front without unit removal.
           8.  Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or other unit.
           9.  Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so doors cannot be
               opened with unit energized. Provide defeater mechanism to allow intentional access and
               energizing at any time by qualified individual.
           10. External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing, padlockable in
               OFF position with up to three-lock capability.
           11. Cable Entrance: Main leads enter from bottom; control and feeder circuits enter from
               top and bottom.

      C.   Bus:
           1.     Horizontal Power Bus:
                       Three-phase tin-plated, copper, entire width of control center, rated: as indicated.
                        Construct to allow future extension of additional sections.
                       Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable.
                       Isolated from top horizontal wireway.

ONWASA                                                                  LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       2660 00-5
ARCADIS                                                                                         Punted: 4.5.2011
Project No. NOON WAO8. 0006
                    e.    Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.
              2.    Vertical Power Bus:
                         Three-phase tin-plated, copper, full height of section, rated 300 amperes minimum.
                         Tin-plated at joints.
                         Sandwich type bus insulation providing dead front constructIon with starter units
                        removed except for bus stab openings.
                        Insulated and isolated barrier, complete with shutters,
                        Provide BelleviEle washers on bus connection bolts.
              3.    Neutral Bus: None.
              4.    Ground Bus:
                        Copper, tin-plated, entire width of control center and in each vertical wireway.
                        Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.
              5.    Bus Bracing: 100,000 amperes or 65000 amperes RMS symmetrical, as noted on
                    drawings.

              Motor Controller Unit:
              1.    Provide indicated individual components and control devices including pushbuttons,
                    selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time delay relays, and elapsed time
                    meters as specified in Section 26 10 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
              2.    Construction:
                        Drawout combination type with stab connections for starters NEMA CS, Size 5 and
                        smaller.
                         Bolt-on combination type with cable connection to riser for starters NEMA CS,
                         Size 6 and larger.
                         Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size.
                         Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards on all units.
              3.    Starters:
                    a.   NEMA lOS 18, standard rating, except none smaller than NEMA lOS, Size 1.
                    b.   Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled for 65,000 amperes at 480 volts
                         short circuit capacity with overload protection.
                    c.   Three-phase, non-reversing, unless specified otherwise.
                    d.   Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector or Circuit breaker.
                    e.   Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter:
                              Control: As shown.
                              Indicating Lights: RedON and GreenOFF.
                    f.   Combination Reduced Voltage, Solid State Starter:
                              Control: As shown.
                            Bypass contactor.
                            Class 10/20/30 electronic overload relay, switch, or dip switch selectable.
                            Kick start, with adjustable torque and time settings.
                            Ramp start, selectable current or torque, and adjustable time.
                            Smooth stop ramp, adjustable time.
                            Phase loss unbalance and phase reversal protection.
                            LED display or LCD of fault, N.O. contact to communicate fault condition.
                    g.   Combination Two-Speed Motor Magnetic Starter:
                            Control: As shown.
                            Suitable for two-speed, two winding motors:
                                indicating Lights: GreenOFF RedHIGH SPEED, AmberLOW SPEED.
                    h.   Combination Reversing, Magnetic Starter:
                            Control: As shown.
                            Suitable for squirrel cage motors.
                              Indicating Lights: GreenOFF, RedFORWARD, and AmberREVERSE.
                         Combination Adjustable Frequency Drive, Solid State Starter: Drives as specified in
                         Section 26 45 00 - Low-Voltage AdjustabJe Frequency Drive System.
                    j.   Communications: Microprocessor interface capability to corn puter.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER                                                                    ONWASA
26 60 00 6                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                       k.   Padlockable operating handle when deenergized with up to three-lock capability.
                       I.   Unit door interlocked to prevent opening when disconnect is in closed position.
                            Mechanical interlocked to prevent placing disconnect in ON position when unit door
                            is open.
                            Minimum Dimensions: 12 inches high by full section width, less vertical wireway.

-                 4.

                  5.
                       Disconnecting Device:
                       a.    Pad lockable in OPEN position for up to three locks.
                       Circuit Breaker:
                            Meet requirements of NEMA AR 1 and UL 489.
                            Molded case with manufacturer's recommended trip setting for maximum motor
                            protection.
                            Thermal-magnetic trip or magnetic trip only as shown. Tripping indicated by
                            operating-handle position.
                            Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short circuit capacity
                           indicated.
                  6.   Fused Switch:
                           Heavy-duty, motor rated, load-break, quick-make,           quick-break type meeting
                           requirements of LJL 0098 and NEMA KS 1.
                           Current limiting fuses, with rejection clips.
                  7.   Load Detector Relay:
                       a.  Manual reset with adjustable differential.
                  8.   Thermal Motor Overload Protection:
                           Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
                            Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated melting alloy, ratchet
                            principle type element.
                            Relay Trip: Standard, Class 20.
                            Manual reset.
                            Provide in each ungrounded phase.
                            Mount within starter unit.
                  9.   Solid State Motor Overload Protection:
                            Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
                            Phase loss, phase unbalance and Class II ground fault protection.
                            Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
                            Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
,.-.                   e.   One NO. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
                       f.   Manual reset.
                            Provide in each ungrounded phase.
                            Mount within starter unit.
                            Communications: Microprocessor interface capability to computer.
                  10. Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual-reset interposing relay for connection to
                       motor-mounted thermal protector system.
                  11. Ground Fault Protection: Where indicated and as specified in Paragraph Main Protective
                       Device and Feeder Units, except provide instantaneous operation device.

             E.   Control Unit:
                  1,  Disconnecting Device: Pull-apart terminal blocks capable of deenergizing external source
                      control circuits in unit.
                       Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 26 10 05 - Basic Electrical
                       Materials and Methods.
                       Control Wiring:
                           Copper, 14 AWG, minimum.
                           Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each end of wires.
                           Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp terminals.
                           Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal blocks.


       ONWASA                                                              LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
       NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 6000 7
       ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
       Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
        F.    Incoming Line Terminal:
                  Construction: As specified in Paragraph, Motor Controller Unit.
                  Incoming Service Feeder: Cable.

        G.    Feeder Unit:
              t   Construction: As specified in Paragraph Motor Controller Unit.
              2,  Static Trip Circuit Breaker:
                       In accordance with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
                        Feeder protective device.
                         Insulated or molded case breakers with ambient insensitive solid-state trips and
                        having current sensors and logic circuits integral in breaker frame.
                        Solid-state current control with adjustabLe ampere setting, adjustable long-time
                        delay, adjustable short-time trip and delay band, fixed or adjustable instantaneous
                        trip, and adjustable ground fault trip and delay band.
                        Setting adjustments to be covered by a sealable, tamper-proof, transparent cover
                        (insulated case breakers only) or by compartment door for other breakers).
                        Locate trip button on front cover of breaker to permit mechanical simulation
                        overcurrent tripping for test purposes and to trip breaker quickly in emergency
                        situation.
              3.    Molded Case Circuit Breaker:
                        In accordance with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
                        Feeder protective device.
                         Thermal-magnetic trip and interrupting capacity required for connection to system
                        with short circuit capacity indicated.
                        Indicate tripping by operating-handle position.
                        Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.
              4.    Phase Monitoring Relay:
                    a.  Three-phase monitoring relay to protect against ow voltage, voltage unbalance, and
                        phase reversal.

        H.    Power Meter and Instruments:
                  Electric power meter shall provide continuous monitoring of a three phase system. Meter
                    shalt measure current, voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, power factor and
                    frequency
                    Meter shall be panel mount design with integrated display. Display shall be a Liquid
                    Crystal Display (LCD), minimum 40-character display capable of clearly displaying
                    alphanumeric characters. Meter shall be programmable for keypad.
                    Meter shall be able to provide demand metering for energy and power. Demand shall be
                    programmable for Thermal or Rolling demand with the demand interval of 5-60 minutes in
                    step of 1.
                    Direct voltage input up to 600 volts ac.
                    Current input via current transformer with 5-ampere secondary.
                    Programmable current and potential transformer ratios.
                    Programmable limits to activate up to four alarms.
                    Selectable Voltage Measurements: Line-to-line or line-to-neutral and wye or delta.
                    Meter shall provide a true RMS monitoring of Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca,
                    voltage/current unbalance, power factor, line frequency, watts, vars, VA, Wh, varh,
                    VAh, and demand readings for A, W, vars, and VA. Maximum and minimum values of
                    measured quantities shall also be recorded and date/time stamped
                    Display:
                         Volts, three-phase.
                        Amperes, three-phase.
                        Kilowatts.
                        Kilowatt-hours.
                        kW Demand with programmable period intervals.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER                                                                   ONWASA
26 60 00 -                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                  ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. DOOS
                        kVA Demand.
                        Current Demand.
                        kVA.
                       kVAR.
                       kVARh.
                       Current THD.
                  1.   Voltage THD.
                  Voltage Rating: 95 to 135 ac.
                  Communications: Ethernet capability. Meter shall be able to communicate to plant
                  SCADA system through the use of Ethernet using TCP/IP. The Ethernet module shall
                  support both lOBaseT (copper) and lOBaseF (fiber optic) connections. Meter shall not
                  require any proprietary software for monitoring and communicating with plant SCADA
                  system.

            SPD: As specified in Section 26 50 00 - Surge Protective Devices.

            Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters, Control Relays,
            Time-Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in Section 26 10 05, Basic Electrical
            Materials and Methods.

            Nameplates.
               Laminated plastic; white, engraved to black core.
               Provide for each motor control center and each unit.
               Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram.
               Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units.
               Attach with stainless steel pan head screws on face of control center.

       L,   Space Heaters: ThermostaticaUy controlled. Locate in bottom of each vertical section for
            operation from 120-volt power source derived internal to MOO.

       M.    Power Alert:
                 Provide universal power alert at each starter to verify electrical isolation. Indication
                 shall be on front of motor starter enclosure or door. Adjustable frequency drives shall
                 include two power alert devices. One device shall be installed on the secondary side of
                 the disconnecting means. The second unit shall be installed on the DC bus to monitor the
                 DC bus voltage.
                 Device shall be wired to load side of starter disconnect/circuit breaker and indication shall
                 mount on front of starter in 30 mm knockout.
                 Device shall be UL listed and monitor any combination of the four inputs, Li, L2, L3, and
                 GND.
                 Rated Voltage: Single phase or three phase, 40-75OVAC.
                 Indicators: Flashing indication when voltage is present.
                 Provide ATC Diversified Electronic Universal Power Alert UPA-130.

2.4    SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

      A.    Factory Testing:
                Applicable Standards: NEMA lOS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430, Part H.
                Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA requirements to
                 verify components have been designed to specification, assembled in accordance with
                 applicable standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
                 Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise, inspect and perform
                 continuity checks.



ONWASA                                                                LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                       2660 00-9
ARcADIs                                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8, 0006
              4.    Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on diagrams or as
                    called for in Specifications.
              5.    Control Circuits and Devices:
                         Energize circuit at rated voltage
                         Operate control devices.
                         Perform continuity check
              6.    Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Equipment:
                         Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values with connection to
                         devices made at outgoing terminal blocks.
                         Verify protective relays operated for functional checks and trips manually initiated to
                         verify functioning of operation for indicator and associated circuits.
              7.    Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except potential transformers.
                    Tests shall be made phase-to-phase and phase to around with 60-cycle test voLtages
                    applied for 1 second at 2640 volts.
              8.    Verify equipment passed tests and inspection.
              9.    Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists and final certified and signed test
                    report.

PART 3 EXECUTION

31      INSTALLATION

              Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, ANSI 02, Submittals, and manufacturer's
              written instructions and recommendations.

              Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate
              for specified seismic conditions.

              Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.

              Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders.

              Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads.

              Retighten current carrying bolted connections and enclosure support framing and panels to
              manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2     CIRCUIT BREAKERS

              Field adjust trip settings of breakers and motor starters based on the recommendations of the
              coordination study.

              Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current. Determine motor rated current from
              motor nameplate following installation.

3.3     OVERLOAD RELAY

        A.    Select and install overload relay heaters and switch settings after actual nameplate full-load
              current rating of motor has been determined.

3.4     MOTOR DATA

        A.    Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each motor starter enclosure door
              displaying the following information:

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER                                                                    ONWASA
266000-10                                                   NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                Motor served by tag number and equipment name.
                Nameplate horsepower.
                Motor code letter.
                Full load amperes.
                Service factor.
                Installed overload relay heater catalog number.

3.5   MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

      A.   Furnish manufacturer's representative for startup, Start-up, for the following services at jobsite
           or classroom as designated by Engineer, for minimum man-days listed below, travel time
           excluded:
                1 man-day for installation assistance, and inspection of installation.
                1 man-day for functional and performance testing.
                1/2 man-day for plant startup.
                1,4 man-day for training of Owner's personnel


                                            END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    2660 00 11
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                             SECTION 26 65 00

                                     LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1      GENERAL

 1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

       A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
             Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
             Section.

1.2    REFERENCES

       A.   The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
            1.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C57.96, Guide for Loading Dry
                 Type Transformers.
            2.   National Electrical Contractors Association (NJECA): 409, Recommended Practice for
                 Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers.
            3.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                      250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
                      ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.
                      TP 1, Guide For Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers.
            4.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
            5.   Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
                 a 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or
                        Copper Conductors.
                        489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
                        Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
                        1561, Standard for Dry-Type, General Purpose, and PowerTransformers.

1.3    SUBMITTALS

       A.   Action Submittals:
                 Descriptive information.
                 Dimensions and weight.
                 Transformer nameplate data.
                 Schematic and connection diagrams.

       B.   Informational Submittals:
            1.   Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (0 to 600-volt,
                 primary).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1    GENERAL

            UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated.

            Dry-type, self-cooled, two winding, with aluminum windings.




ONWASA                                                                      LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                  2665 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                    Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
        C.    Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
              ampacity.

              Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Table 4.2 of NEMA TP 1

        E.    Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20:
                  40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA
                  45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA.
                  50 decibels for 51 kVA to 150 kVA.
                  55 decibels for 151 kVA to 300 kVA.
                  60 decibels for 301 kVA to 500 kVA.

        F.    Overload capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96.

        G.    Wall Bracket For single-phase units, 15 kVA to 37-1/2 kVA, and for three-phase units, 15 kVA
              to 30 kVA.

        ft    Vibration Isolators:
                   Rated for transformer's weight.
                   Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound emitted              by
                   transformer.
                   Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external vibration isolators
                    30 kVA and above Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer enclosure with
                    integral vibration isolator.

2.2     MINI-POWER CENTER (MPC)

        A.    General: Transformer, primary and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary
              panelboard section enclosed in NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 stainless steel enclosure.

        B.    Transformer:
                   Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard.
                  Core and Coil: Encapsulated.
                   Full capacity, 2-1/2 percent voltage taps, two above and two below normal voltage
                   Primary Voltage: 480, three-phase.
                  Secondary Voltage: 208/120 volts, three-phase, four-wire.

        C.    Panelboard: Full, UL 489, short-circuit current rated.
                  Type: Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, indicating, with non-interchangeable
                  molded case circuit breakers.
                  Number and Breaker Ampere Ratings: Refer to Panel Schedule.

2.3     GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER

        A.    insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard.

        B.    Core and Coil:
                    Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for three-phase units 3 kVA
                    to 15 kVA.
                    Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for
                    three-phase units 30 RVA and above.




LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS                                                                          ONWASA
266500-2                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARcADIS
                                                                                Prolect No. NCONWAO8. 0006
      C.   Enclosure:
               Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, non-ventilated.
               Single-Phase, 37-1/2 kVA and above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated.
               Three-Phase, 3 kVA to '15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, non-ventilated.
               Three-Phase, 30 <VA and above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated.
               Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel.
               Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel.

      D.   Voltage Taps:
                Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 10 kVA:       Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two
                below normal voltage rating.
                Single-Phase, 15 kVA and above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above arid two
                below normal voltage rating.
                Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity: two above and two
                below normal voltage rating.
                Three-Phase, 30 kVA and above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two
                below normal voltage rating.

      E.   Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger.

 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   INSTALLATION

           Install in accordance with NEGA and manufacturer's instructions.

           Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact
           with mounting surface.

           Provide moisture-proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections.

           Connect voltage ffips to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load
           conditions.

           Provide wall brackets for single-phase units, 15 kVA to 167-1/2 kVA, and three-phase units,
           15 kVAto 112 kVA.


                                            END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                            LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATiON FACILITY                                                     26 65 00 -3
ARCADIS                                                                                       printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAD8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                                   SECTION 26 70 00

                                                    PAN ELBOARDS

     PART 1     GENERAL

    1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

           A.    Drawings     and    general   provisions   of   the   Contract,   including   General   Conditions,
                 Supplementary Conditions (if included), arid Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
                 Section.

     1.2   REFERENCES

           A.   The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                1.   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
                           C62.1, Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits.
                           C62.1 1 Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits.
                 2.   National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 407, Recommended Practice for
                      Installing and Maintaining Pane Iboards.
                3.    National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
                           250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
                           289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
                            AB 1, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, arid Circuit-Breaker
                            Enclosures.
                            KS 1, Enclosed Switches
                      a.    LA 1, Surge Arrestors.
                            PB 1, Panelboards.
                           PB 1.1, General instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
                           Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
                4.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                5.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
                           67, Standard for Panelboards.
                           98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
n                          486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or
                           Copper Conductors.
                            489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
                            Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
                            508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
                            870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.
                            943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

    1.3    SUBMITTALS

           A.   Action Submittals:
                      Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory
                      item, and component.
                      Manufacturer's shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for
                      each paneiboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement.
                      Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following:
                          Protective devices with factory settings.
                          Provisions for future protective devices.
                          Space for future protective devices.
                          Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings.


    ONWASA                                                                                           PANELBOARDS
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                        26 7000 - 1
    ARCADIS                                                                                          Printed: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                           Enclosure type.
                           Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings.
                           Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range.
                           Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system voltage.
                           Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary components.

        B.    Informational Submittals:
              1.   Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.    Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as
              defined in NEC Article 100.

1.5     EXTRA MATERIALS

        A.    Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts,
              special tools, and material:
                     Item                                           Quantity
                    Touch-up paint for panelboards                  One half-pint container


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1     MANUFACTURERS

        A.    Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as equipment furnished under Section 26 60
              00, Low-Voltage Motor Control. This requirement includes all panelboards that are provided
              inside generator enclosures.

2,2     GENERAL

        A.    Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance with this
              Section including panelboards installed in other equipment specified in Section 26 60 00,
                       ,

              Low-Voltage Motor Control.

        B.    Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.

        C.    Wire Terminations:
                    Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable for use with
                    75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC 75 degrees C conductor
                    ampacity.
                    In accordance with UL 486E.

        D.    Load Current Ratings:
                  Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus
                  and circuit breakers, are non-continuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be
                  80 percent of non-continuous rating.
                    Where indicated "continuous", '100 percent", etc., selected components and protective
                    devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown.

        E.    Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit rating for each
              panelboard assembly shall be no less than the fol]owing:


PANELBOARDS                                                                                          ONWASA
267000-2                                                      NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                I      Minimum SCCR at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts shall be 10,000 amperes
                       RMS symmetrical, unless indicated otherwise on the associated panel schedule shown in
                       the Drawings.
                2.     Minimum SCCR at 480Y/277 volts shall be 35000 amperes RMS symmetrical, unless
                       indicated otherwise on the associated pane] schedule shown in the Drawings.

           F.   Overcurrent Protective Devices:
                    In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL489.
                    Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation.
                            Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without
                            removing main bus.
                            Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover.
                3      Series-Connected Short Circuit Ratings: Devices shall be fully rated; series-connected
                       ratings unacceptable.

           G.   Circuit Breakers:
                1.   General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make, quick-break, molded
                     case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle.
                2.   Non-interchangeable: In accordance with NEC.
                3.   Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in all panelboards.
                4.   Trip Mechanism:
                           Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
                            Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to lox for
                            frames greater than 100 amps.
fl                     C.   Two and three pole, common trip.
                            Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole.
                           Test button on covei
                           Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
                5.     Unacceptable Substitution:
                           Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi-pole breakers.
                           Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces.
p               6.     Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified
                       above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within
                       0025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel).
                           Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.
                           Push-to-test button.
                           Reset button.
                7.     Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker specified
                       above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault (UL listed for
                       equipment ground fault protection).

           H.   Enclosures:
                       Provide as specified in Section 26 1005 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
                       Material: Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S shall be code-gauge, hot-dip galvanized sheet
                       steel with reinforced steel frame.
                       Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel or
                       lacquer.
                4,     All panelboards installed outside shall include a NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel enclosure
                       and an integral transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS).

                Bus:
                       Material: Copper full sized throughout length.
                       Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of bus regardless of
                       number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and
                       future positions.

     ONWASA                                                                                         PANELBOARDS
     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      267000-3
     ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4,5.2011
     Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
              Feeder Lugs: Main, feed-through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted mechanical or
              crimp compression type.

        K.    Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of
              ground conductors, and bonded to box.
              I    Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole
                  positions.
              2.   Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder,
                  grounding electrode, etc.

        L.    Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral
              conductors, and isolated from box.
                  Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole
                  positions.
                  Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors.

        M.    Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary
              appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated.

2.3     LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

        A.    Protective Device Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main and subfeed
              devices; also provide for branch devices where indicated.

        B,    Multisection Panelboards: Where more than 42 poles are required or more than one section is
              otherwise indicated, provide multiple panelboards with separate fronts.
                    Panelboard sections shall be individually installed and field interconnected to form a
                    single electrical unit.
                    Unless otherwise indicated, provide feed-through lugs on each section but last.
                    Surface-mount panels shall be individually mounted and may be different sizes.
                    Recessed-mount panels shall be individually mounted and the same size tub and flush
                    cover.
                    Surface-mount multisection panelboards may be comprised of sections of unequal
                    heights.
                    Provide feed-through and main lugs in individual sections as required for field assembly
                    of a complete multisection panelboard.
                    Provide neutral and ground terminal bars in each section.

        C.    NEMA 250 Type 1 Branch Panelboard Enclosure:
                 Front trim shall be secured to box with concealed trim clamps.
                 Surface-mount panelboard front trim shall have same dimensions as box.
                 Flush panelboards front trims shall overlap box nominal 3/4 inch on all sides.
                 Door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, shall provide access to protective
                 device operating handles.
                 Doors over 30 inches in height shall have multipoint latching.
                 Door lock shall be secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all panetboards keyed alike,
                 with two milled keys each lock.
                 Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and enclosed card, mounted
                 inside each panel door.

2.4     POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

        A.    Branch Protective Devices:
              1.  Locking: Furnish devices with provisions for handle padlocking.

PANELBOARDS                                                                                       ONWASA
267000 4                                                  NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACELITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                 ARCADIS
                                                                                Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                   Load Connections: Wire lugs shall be mechanical or crimp compression type,
                   removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating
                   switch nor conductor ampacity.
                   Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares.

 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   GENERAL

           Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers' written installation
           i nstructions

           Install securely, plumb, inline and square with walls.

           Install top of cabinet trim78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops
           of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor.

           Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices             in
           accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289.

           Install filler plates in unused spaces.

           Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap with nylon wire
           ties.

3.2   BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD

           Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

           Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.

           Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel
           into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. Stub four
           1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade.

           All panelboards installed outside shall be rated NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel and shall
           include an integral transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS).

3.3   POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD

      A.   Provide engraved identification for each protective device.



                                             END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                                        PANELBOARDS
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 70 00-5
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
THIS PAGE INTENT]ONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                                 SECTION 26 70 05

                                          CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

    PART 1      GENERAL

     1,1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

           A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
                 Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
                 Section.

    1.2    SECTION INCLUDES

           A.    Construction and fabrication requirements for manufacturer and vendor control panels.

    1.3    SHOP DRAWINGS

           A.    Provide catalog sheets on all equipment provided including full model number of all
                components, listing of optional features being provided, voltage ratings, dimensional data, and
                manufacturer product specifications.

           B.   Provide schematics and wiring diagrams representing all terminals, wiring, and components
                located within the panel; develop diagrams and Drawings utilizing AutoCAD 2010 software.
                Follow NFPA 79, Chapter 2-2, Diaqrams,
                     Provide ladder-logic diagrams with cross-referencing scheme for each relay and output
                     device; include numbering string down power side of diagram.
                     Utilize ANSI Y32.2 symbols for all field devices.
                     Show functional descriptor for each device or component.
                     Show alpha-numeric reference for all conductors and terminals.
                     Show connections to devices located external to the panel in phantom.

           C.   If control panel includes a programmable logic controller (PLC), provide PLC schematics for all
                I/O modules; follow format guidelines established in Appendix 0 of NFPA 79. Identify Rack,
                Group, and Module. Show position of all dip switch settings.

           D.   Construction and Assembly: Provide information on the enclosure type, wall thickness,
I               dimensions, doors, gaskets, finish, and structural support members.

           E.   Panel Layout Drawings: Provide layout of panel interior and front panel-mounted devices,
                showing location of all equipment, relays, power supplies, terminal strips, and wire channels.
                Follow format guidelines established in Appendix D of NFPA 79.

           F.   Installation Details: Provide footprints of panels and enclosures to show location of all conduit
                entrances. Provide information on panel anchoring and supports.

    1.4    RECORD DOCUMENTS

           A.   Submit all diagrams and drawings for the Shop Drawing submittal. Incorporate all field
                changes using CAD software. Submit CD containing all finalized drawing files.




    ONWASA                                                                           CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 70 05 1
    ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCCNWAO8. D006
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1     OPERATING CONDITIONS

              Provide products suitable for operation under the following conditions B through H.

              Ambient Operating Temperature: As indicated; otherwise, 5 to 40 degrees C for indoor
              enclosures, 25 to 40 degrees C for outdoor enclosures.

              Altitude: As indicated; otherwise, up to 3,300 feet.

        ft    Supply Voltage: As indicated; otherwise, 90 to 110 percent of rated voltage, ±2 percent of
              rated frequency, and up to 10 percent of total RMS sum of the second through the fifth
              harmonics plus 2 percent RMS sum of the sixth through the thirtieth harmonics.

              Radio Frequency Voltages: As indicated; otherwise, 2 percent RMS above 10 kl-lz.

              Impulse Voltage: As indicated; otherwise, 200 percent peak voltage up to 1 microsecond
              duration with a rise time of 500 nanoseconds to 500 microseconds.

              Voltage Drop: As indicated; otherwise, reduction of 50 percent of peak voltage for 1/2 cycle or
              20 percent for one cycle. More than 1 second between successive reductions.

              Micro-interruption: As indicated; otherwise, supply disconnected or at zero voltage for 3
              microseconds at any random time in cycle. More than I second between successive
              reductions.

2.2     ENCLOSURES

        A.    Manufacturers:
                  EPI Electrical Enclosures.
                  Hoffman.
                  Or equal.

        B.    Conform to requirements of NEMA 250.

        C.    Construction: As indicated; otherwise, NEMA 12, minimum for indoor enclosures; NEMA 4X
              for outdoor enclosures; NEMA 7 for enclosures located in hazardous areas.

        D.    Sheet Steel:     Minimum 14 gage thickness.       Provide stiffeners, angles, and supports for
              components.

        E.    Corrosion-Resistant Enclosures: Fiberg lassreinfcrced polyester or stainless steel.

        F.    Covers:      As indicated; otherwise, continuous hinge and gasketed. Include stainless-steel
              quick-release latches and stainless steel padlock hasp for NEMA 4X enclosures.

        G.    Finishing:
                    Painted Steel Panels: Finished with manufacturer's standard enamel over phosphatized
                    surfaces inside and out; interior color to be white.
                    Stainless Steel Panels: Unpainted smooth brushed finish.




CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES                                                                         ONWASA
26 70 05-2                                                 NORTHWEST REG(ONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                               ARCADIS
                                                                                    Proiect No. NCONWAO8. DOOS
2.3    ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS

      A.   Provide control switches, indicating lights, and relays; follow Section 26 55 00 - Low Voltage
           Switchgear.

2.4   POWER SUPPLIES

           Provide a disconnect and overcurrent protection for the incoming supply circuit.

           Provide control power transformers and power supplies for circuits and equipment rated at
           voltages other than the incoming supply circuit. Include overcurrent protection for all power
           supplies. Provide control power transformers.

2.5   MOTOR CONTROLLERS

      A.   Follow Section 26 60 00 - Low Voltage Motor Control Center. Include ambient-compensated
           overload protection, disconnect, and motor circuit short circuit protection.

2,6   WIRING

      A.   Power Wiring: Stranded copper, Type MTW or Type THWN, minimum size No. 14 AWG, 600
           volt insulation.

      B.   Control Wiring: Stranded copper, Type MTW or SIS, minimum size No. 14 AWG, 600 volt
           insulation.

      C.   Discrete Signal Wiring: Stranded copper, Type MTW, minimum size No. 16 AWG, 600 volt
           insulation.

      D.   Analog Signal Wiring: Two-conductor stranded copper cable, Type CL3R. 100 percent foil
           shielding with No. 22 AWG tinned, stranded copper drain wire. 300 volt-rated PVC insulation.

      E.   Insulation Color Code:
                Black: Line, load, and control circuits at line voltage.
                Red: AC control circuit at less than line voltage.
                Blue: DC control circuits.
                Yellow: Control circuits energized from an external source.
                Green: Equipment ground.
                White: Neutral or grounded circuit conductor.

      F.   Provide terminal blocks for external wiring connections. Provide two spare terminals after
           every ten terminals. In addition, provide two spare terminals at the top and two spare
           terminals at the bottom of every terminal strip.

      G.   Group and support conductors. Provide channel duct or plastic spiral wrap.

2.7   DiN MOUNTING RAIL

           Railings Mounted Between 3 Inches or Smaller Plastic Wireways: Allen-Bradley 1492-D 125.

           Railings Mounted Between 4 Inches or Larger Plastic Wireways: Allen-Bradley 1492-DR6, or
           as approved with 2-1/4 inch standoff.


ONWASA                                                                          CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                     26 70 05-3
ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5 2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
2.8    IDENTiFICATION DETAiLS

      A.   Provide enclosure, wire, and component identification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   FABRICATION

           Size enclosure to provide 20 percent spare space on panel back plate. Calculate spare space
           as the difference between the total surface area of the back plate less the footprint surface
           area of all equipment mounted to the back plate.

           Mount equipment within enclosure such that all status and diagnostic indicators are visible
           from the door side of the enclosure.

           Do not mount equipment or terminal strips on panel interior top, sides, or bottom unless
           approved by ENGINEER. Exception: Interior panel light may be mounted to the panel top.

           If control panel includes a PLC, arrange inputloutput cards in the PLC rack in the following left
           to right, top to bottom sequence: AC voltage discrete inputs, AC voltage discrete outputs, DC
           voltage discrete inputs, DC voltage discrete outputs, DC voltage/current analog inputs, DC
           voltage/current analog outputs. Provide spare slot between each type of card as space in
           rack allows, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

           Utilize DIN No. 3 mounting rails for mounting of relays, terminals, and other components. Use
           2-1/4 inch standoff DIN rails where railing is placed between 4 inch deep plastic wireways.

3.2   INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

           Utilize dry contacts for interfacing discrete signals with external systems.

           Pilot lamps, selector switches, and other devices located on the vendor control panel shall not
           be powered from external sources. Pilot lamps which provide "running" or "trouble" signals
           shall be designed to accept a single dry contact from the motor starter or external system.
           Pilot lamps shall be sourced from the same power as the vendor control panel. Selector
           switches on vendor control panels shall be wired to control relays to produce a single dry
           contact for control of each external motor load.

           Interfacing of discrete control signals, permissives, and lockout signals with external systems
           shalt utilize dry contacts. The dry contacts shall be consolidated to a single terminal strip
           location within the vendor control panel, with identification that external control voltages exist
           on these terminals.

           Vendor control panels shall be designed to accept only one dry contact for monitoring each
           "running", "trouble", "permissive", and "in auto" signal provided by external systems.
           Additional dry contracts, if required, shall be produced within the vendor control panel by
           utilizing interposing relays.

3.3   DEMONSTRATION

      A.   Provide complete functional testing of all cabinets, enclosures, circuits, and included
           equipment.



CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES                                                                          ONWASA
26 7005 4                                                NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                ARCADIS
                                                                               Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
 3.4   PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

       A.   Lock out equipment until it is ready for demonstration.


                                             END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                       26 70 05-5
ARCADIS                                                                         Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWA08. 0006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                           SECTION 26 75 00

                                                LIGHTING

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
            Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
            Section

1.2   REFERENCES

      A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
            'I.  Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
                 Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM).
                 Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
                 Hluminating Engineering Society of North America (FESNA).
                 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Recommended Practice
                on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
                National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical
                Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
                National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) -
                Softbound Version.
                Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
                     595, Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures.
                     844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
                     924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment,

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.   Action Submittals:
                Shop Drawings:
                a.  Interior Luminaires:
                          Catalog data sheets and pictures.
                          Luminaire finish and metal gauge.
                          Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
                          Candlepower distribution curves in two or more planes.
                         Candlepower chart 0 degree to 90 degrees.
                         Lumen output chart.
                         Average maximum brightness data in foot Lamberts.
                         Coefficients of utilization for zone I cavity calculations.
                         Mounting or suspension details.
                         Heat exchange and air handling data.
                b.  Exterior Luminaires:
                         Catalog data sheets and pictures.
                         Luminaire finish and metal gauge.
                         Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
                         IESNA lighting classification and isolux diagram.
                         Fastening details to wall or pole.
                         Ballast type, location, and method of fastening.
                         For light poles, submit wind loading, complete dimensions, and finish.
                c.  Lamps:


ONWASA                                                                                               LIGHTING
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILItY                                                       2675 00 1
ARCADIS                                                                                      Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                                Voltages.
                                Colors.
                                Approximate life (in hours).
                                Approximate initial lumens.
                                Lumen maintenance curve.
                                Lamp type and base.
                                Copy of lamp order, induding individual quantities, for Project.
                    d.     Ballasts:
                                Type.
                                Wiring diagram.
                                Nominal watts and input watts
                                Input voltage and power factor.
                                Starting current, line current, and restrike current values.
                                Sound rating.
                                Temperature rating.
                                Efficiency ratings.
                                Low tern perature characteristics.
                                Emergency ballasts rating and capacity data.
                    e.     Photo-Time Control:
                                Wiring diagram.
                                Contact ratings.
                    f.     Photocells:
                                Voltage, and power consumption.
                                Capacity.
                                Contacts and time delay.
                                Operating levels.
                                Enclosure type and dimensions.
                                Temperature range.
                    g.     Occupancy Sensors:
                                Type.
                                Switching capacity.
                                Coverage.
                                Time delay AUTO/OFF adjustment.
                    h.     Low Voltage Remote Control Wiring System:
                                Type.
                                Switching capacity
                                Voltage rating.
                                Wiring diagrams.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

        A.    Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
                  Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where
                    required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
                    recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to
                    provide a basis for approval under NEC.
                    Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
                    Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
                    applied UL listing mark.

1.5     EXTRA MATERIALS

        A.    Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and
              materials:


LiGHTING                                                                                             ONWASA
2675 00-2                                                     NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Printed; 4.5.2011                                                                                    ARCADIS
                                                                                   Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                 Item                                           Quantity
                 Spare ballast of each type                     Two complete sets per fixture type
                 Spare lamps of each type                       Two complete sets per fixture type
                 Spare fuses                                    Two complete sets per fixture type

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1   LUMINAIRES

           Specific requirements relative to execution of the Work of this section are located in Luminaire
           Schedule on Drawings.

           Feed-through type, or separate junction box.

           Ballasts: Two-lamp when possible.

      0.   Tandem wired for three-lamp, fluorescent fixtures.

      E    Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG.

      F.   Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from ceiling.

      G.   Soffit Installations:
                 UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR DAMP LOCATIONS.
                 Ballast: Removable, prewirecf

      H.   Exterior Installations:
           1   UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS.
           2.   Ballast: Removable, prewired.
           3.  When factory-installed photocells are provided, entire assembly shall have UL label.

           Marine Environments:
                UL Labeled: MARINE, OUTSIDE TYPE.
                Housing: Copper-free, aluminum in accordance with UL 595.

      J.   Hazardous Classified Areas:
           1.  UL Labeled: CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS C AND D. Fixture Enclosure and Fittings:
               Copper-free, cast aluminum in accordance with UL 844.

2.2   LAMPS

      A.   Fluorescent:
                Type Efficiency: Energy.
                Color: White.

      B.   High Intensity Discharge:
               Type: High pressure sodium and metal halide.
               Color: Clear.

      C.   Incandescent Quartz: Clear.

      D.   Tungsten Halogen:
               Type Efficiency: Energy.
               Color: Clear.

ONWASA                                                                                               LIGHTING
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                    26 7500-3
ARCADIS                                                                                      Prrited: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
2.3     BALLASTS

        A.    General:
                    Meet requirements for fixture light output, reliable starting, radio interference, total
                    harmonic distortion, electromagnetic interference, and dielectric rating.
                    Certified by electrical testing laboratory to conform to CBM specifications.

               Fluorescent (Electromagnetic):
                    Type: High power factor, energy efficient, rapid-start type ballast, compatible with lamps
                    specified
                    Sound Rating: Minimum A, maximum allowable noise level of 30 decibels measured
                    2 feet from installed fixture.
                    Class: P.
                    Automatic resetting, thermo-protector to prevent case temperature from exceeding
                    110 degrees C in event of short circuit.
                    For use in exterior located ballasts to produce reliable starting of lamps at minus
                    20 degrees F at 90 percent of normal line voltage.

        C.     Fluorescent (Electronic):
                    Provide in 1 lamp, 2 lamp, or3 lamp models.
                    High frequency ballast of 20k Hz or greater; rapid-start
               3    Meets FCC Part 18.
                    UL listed, Class P, sound rating A.
                    Power factor of 98 percent or greater.
                    Total harmonic distortion THD shall be less than 10 percent.
                    Shall withstand line transients per IEEE 062.41, Cat A.
                    Shall not contain PCB's and shall carry a minimum 3-year manufacturer's warranty.
                    Ballast shall start lamp at a minimum temperature of 0 degree F.

        D.     Metal Halide:
                   High power factor, normal ambient, 180 degrees C insulation class.
                   Types:
                         Autotransformer with capacitor and ignitor for lamps 150 watts and less.
                         Constant wattage autotransformer with capacitor for lamps above 150 watts.

               High Pressure Sodium:
                    High power factor, normal ambient, 180 degrees C insulation class, with capacitor and
                    ignitor.
                    Type:
                          Autotransformer for 50-watt lamps.
                          Constant wattage autotransformer for lamps 70 watts and above.

2.4     LIGHTING CONTROL

        A.    Photocell:
                  Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.
                    Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture, vibration, or
                    temperature changes.
                    Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
                    Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
                    Field adjustable to control operating levels.




LIGHTING                                                                                              ONWASA
267500-4                                                       NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATiON FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                     ARCADIS
                                                                                    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
 2.5   POLES

            Rating (With Luminaire): 125 mph steady winds, without incurred damage.

            Material: Extruded aluminum.

 2.6   EMERGENCY BALLAST

            In accordance with UL 924.

            Nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry in metal case plus ac ballast.

            Solid state charging indicator monitoring light and double-pole test switch.

            Capable of operating one fluorescent lamps for a period of 90 minutes with output of 1100 to
            1,200 lumens.

2.7    IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER AND FUSE

       A.   Fuse Holder:
                General: Waterproof, of corrosion-resistant material.
                Rating: 600 volts.

       B.   Fuse:
                General: Midget, dual element.
                Rating: 5-amp, voltage as required by application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1    LUMINAIRES

       A.   General:
                Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
                Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for complete installation
                and meeting specified seismic requirements.
                Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to
                buHding and to concrete pole bases required to safely mount.
                Install plumb and level.
                Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud.

       B.   Mounting:
               General:
                a.    Mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions shall be coordinated with 26 10
                      00 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
                Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting plate to finished floor
                or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
                Pendant Mounted:
                      Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires, unless otherwise
                     noted.
                     Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent luminaires nominally
                     48 inches apart.
                C.   Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires.
                d.   Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished floor or finished
                     grade, whichever is applicable.

ONWASA                                                                                                 LIGHTING
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILIFY                                                      267500-5
ARCADIS                                                                                        Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NICONWAOO. 0006
              4.    Pole Mounted:
                    a.   Provide cast-in-place concrete base.

              Swinging Type: Provide, at each support, safety cable capable of supporting four times
              vertical toad from structure to luminaire.

              Finished Areas:
                   install symmetrically with tile pattern.
                   Locate with centerlines either on centerline of tile or on joint between adjacent tile runs
                    Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill light will show
                    between ceilings and sealing rings.
                    Combustible Low Density Cellulose Fiberboard: Provide spacers and mount luminaires
                    1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use fixtures suitable for mounting on low-density
                    ceilings.
              5     Junction Boxes:
                          Flush and Recessed Luminaires Locate minimum 1-foot from luminaire.
                          In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessibLe by removing
                         lu mi naire.
              6.    Wiring and Conduit:
                         Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire.
                         Provide flexible steel conduit.
              7.    Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction.
              8.    Independent Supports:
                         Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with two safety chains or two No. 12
                         soft-annealed galvanized steel wires of length needed to secure luminaire to building
                         structure independent of ceiling structure.
                         Tensile strength of chain or wire, and method of fastening to structure shall be
                         adequate to support weight of luminaire.
                         Fasten chain or wire to each end of urn inaire.

              Unfinished Areas: Locate Luminaires to avoid conflict with other building systems or blockage
              of turn inaire light output.
                    Fixture Suspension: Provide 3/8-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor type hangers
                    not permitted.
                    Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or angled hangers.

        F.    Building Exterior: Flush-mounted back box and concealed conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2     LAMPS

        A.    Provide in each fixture, number and type for which fixture is designed, unless otherwise noted.

3.3     BALLASTS

               Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

               Utilize all ballast-mounting holes to fasten securely within Iuminaire.

              Replace noisy or defective ballasts.

3.4     LIGHTING CONTROL

        A.    Outdoor Luminaires: Photocells switch lights ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.



LIGHTING                                                                                            ONWASA
2675 OO-6                                                    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATLON FACILITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                  Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
3.5   EMERGENCY BALLAST

           install battery, charger, and electronic circuitry metal case inside fluorescent fixture housing
           adjacent to ac ballast.

           install monitoring light and double-pole switch adjacent to light fixture.

           Wire in accordance with manufacturers wiring diagrams.

3.6   EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT

      A.   lnsta in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

      B.   Provide permanent circuit connections with conduit and wire.

      C.   Connect to branch circuit feeding normal Ughting in area ahead of all local switches.

      D.   Provide separate circuit wiring to Iuminaire

3.7   CLEANING

           Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark.

           Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.

      C    Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.

      0.   Touch up painted surfaces of Juminaires and poLes with matching paint ordered from
           manufacturer.

      E.   Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion



                                            END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                                              LiGHTING
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                      267500-7
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
                                                SECTION 26 75 05

                                       FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION

    PART 1     GENERAL

T   1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS

          A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
                Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
                Section.

    1.2   REFERENCES

          A.    The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
                1.   Lightning Protection Institute (LPI): 175, Standard of Practice.
                2.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
                          70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
                          780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
                3.   Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
                          96, Standard for Lightning Protection Components.
                          96A, Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.

    1.3   DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

          A.    Provide lightnIng protection system design for the following structures on the Project
                    North Electrical Building.
                     Blower Building.
                    UV Disinfection Building.
                    Chemical Building.
                    Generator Switchg ear Electrical Building.
                    Equipment Building.

          B.   Design lightning protection system to comply with all applicable provisions of LPI 175, UL 96,
               UL 96A, and NFPA 780.

    1.4   SUBMIUALS

          A.   Action Submittals:
               1.   Reproducible Mylar Drawings:
                          Lightning protection system layout.
                          Component locations.
                    C.    Detailed plans.
               2.   Down conductor.
               3.   Connecting conductor.
               4.   Bond strap,
               5.   Air terminals.
               6.   Fittings.
               7.   Connectors.
               8.   Ground rods.

          B.   Informational Submfttals:




    ONWASA                                                                       FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION
    NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                        26 7505   I
    ARCADIS                                                                                       Printed: 4.5.2011
    Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
                   Field test report.
                   Ground Witness Certification-Form LPI-175A.
                   Post-Installation Certification-Form LPI-1 75B.
                   UL 96 Master Label "C' Certification.

1.5    QUALITY ASSURANCE

             Designer: Ughtning protection system design shall be prepared by an LPI certified designer or
             recognized lightning protection manufacturer.

             System components shalL be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
             manufacturing of lightning protection components in accordance with UL 96.

             Lightning protection system shall be installed under direct supervision of an LPI 175 Certified
             Master Installer.

       0.    Inspection of final installation and grounding connection shall be perfornied by an LPI certified
             inspector.

             Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority Having
             Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized
             testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AI-IJ in order to provide a basis for
             approval under NEC.

             Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
             Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL
             listing mark.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1    MANUFACTURERS

       A.    Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:
                 Thompson Lightning.
                 IPC Protection.
                 Erico Eritech Lightning Protection Systems.
                 VFC, inc.

2.2    GENERAL

             Complete system shall bear UL 96 Master Label C.

             System Material: Copper or high copper content, heavy-duty bronze castings unless otherwise
             specified.

             Material shall cam ply in weight, size, and composition for the class of structure to be protected
             as established by NFPA 780.

2.3    COMPONENTS

       A.    Air Terminal:
             1.   Material: Solid copper rods with tapered or blunt points as required for application.



FACILElY LIGHTNING PROTECTION                                                                      ONWASA
26 75 05 2                                                  NORTHWEST REGEONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
Pri1ed: 4.5.2011                                                                                   ARCADIS
                                                                                 Project No. NCONWAO8. D006
                Diameter: 5/8 inch.
                Length: Sufficient to extend minimum 10 inches above object being protected.
                IJL 96 Label B applied to each terminal.

      B.   Conductors:
                Lightning System Conductors: Bare medium hard-drawn stranded copper, or stranded
                aluminum as required for the application.
                Main Down Conductor: Smooth twist stranding, Class I.
                Connecting Conductor: Concentric stranding, Class I
                Bonding Conductor: Flexible strap, minimum 3/4-inch wide by 1/8-inch thick.
                Main down and connecting conductors shall bear the UL 96 Label A, applied every
                10 feet.
                Grounding Conductors: Stranded bare copper.

      C.   Cable Fastener and Accessories: Capable of withstanding minimum pull of 100 pounds.

      0.   Fittings:
                 Heavy-duty.
                Bolts, Screws, and Related Hardware: Stainless steel.

      E    Ground Rods:
               Material: Copper.
               Diameter: 1/2 inch.
               Length: 20 feet.

      F.   Grounding Connections:
               Welds: Exotherrnic process.
               Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy.
               Hardware: Silicone bronze.

      G.   Cable Connections and Splicers:
               Welds: Exothermic process.
               Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy.
               Through-Roof Connectors: Straight or right angle with bronze and lead seal flashing
                washer.

      H.   Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC, as specified in Section 26 25 00, Raceways and Boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1   GENERAL

           Workmanship to comply with all applicable provisions of LPI 175, UL 96, UL 96A, and
           NFPA 780.

           Aluminum materials shall be used where required to meet the galvanic corrosion requirements
           of UL 96A.

           Provide pitch pockets or method compatible with roofing to waterproof roof penetrations.

           Install system in inconspicuous manner so components blend with building aesthetics.




ONWASA                                                                     FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTiON
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   2675 05-3
ARCADIS                                                                                     Printed: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
31    EXAMINATION

      A.   Verify conditions prior to installation. Actual conditions may require adjustments in air terminal
           and ground rod locations.

3.3   1NSTALLATION

      A.   Air Terminals:
           1    Supports: Brackets or braces.
           2.   Parapet Bracket Attachment: Lag or expansion bolts.
           3,   Secure base to roof surface with adhesive or pitch compatible with roofing bond
           4.   Provide terminal flashing at roof penetrations.
           5.   Perimeter Terminals:
                     Maximum Spacing: 20 feet.
                     Maximum Distance From Outside Edge of Building: 2 feet.
           6.   Roof Ridge Terminals: Maximum spacing 20 feet.
           7.   Mid-Roof Terminals: Maximum spacing 50 feet.
           8.   Provide blunt point air terminals for applications exposed to personnel.

      B.   Conductors:
               Conceal whenever practical.
                Provide 1-inch PVC conduit in building walls or columns for main downleads and roof
                risers.
           3    Support: Maximum spacing for exposed conductors.
                     Vertical: 3 foot.
                     Horizontal: 4 foot.
                Maintain horizontal and vertical conductor courses free from dips or pockets.
                Bends: Maximum 90 degrees, with minimum 8-inch radius.
           6    Install air terminal conductors on the structural roof surface before roofing composition is
                applied

      C.   Bonding:
           1.  Bond to Main Conductor System:
                    Roof mounted ventilators, fans, air handlers, masts, flues, cooling towers, hand rails,
                   and other sizeable metal objects
                    Roof flashing, gravel stops, insulation vents, ridge vents, roof drains, soil pipe vents,
                   and other small metal objects if located within 6 feet of main conductors or another
                   grounded object.
           2.   Bond each steel column or major framing members to grounding system.
           3.   Bond each main down conductor to grounding system.

      D.   Grounding System:
           1.  Grounding Conductor:
                    Completely encircle building structure.
                    Bury minimum 1 foot below finished grade.
                    Minimum 2 feet from foundation walls.
           2.  Interconnect ground rods by direct-buried copper cables.
           3.  Maximum Resistance: 5 ohms when connected to ground rods.
           4.  Connections:
                    Install ground cables continuous between connections.
                      Exothermic welded connections to ground rods, cable trays, structural steel,
                     hand rails, and buried and non-accessible connections.




FACILITY UGHTNING PROTECTION                                                                  ONWASA
26 75 05                                                 NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACiLITY
Printed: 4.5.2011                                                                             ARCADIS
                                                                               Proj Na. NCONWAO8. D006
                    Provide bolted clamp type mechanical connectors for all exposed secondary
                    connections.
                    Use bolted offset parapet bases or through-roof concealed base assemblies for air
                    terminal connections.
               e    Provide interconnections with electrical and telephone systems and all underground
                    water, gas, sewer, and metal pipes.
               f.   Provide electric service arrestor ground wire to building water main.

3.4   FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Field Testing:
                Isolate lightning protection system from other ground conditions while performing tests.
                Resistance: Test ground resistance of grounding system by the fall-of-potential method.
                a.   Test Resistance to Ground: Maximum 5 ohms.
                Install additional ground rods as required to obtain maximum allowable resistance.
                Test Report:
                     Description of equipment tested.
                     Description of test.
                     Test results.
                     Conclusions and recommendations.
                     Appendix, including appropriate test forms.
                     Identification of test equipment used.
                     Signature of responsible test organization authority


                                           END OF SECTION




ONWASA                                                                     FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION
NORTHWEST REGIONAL WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY                                                   26 75 05-5
ARCADIS                                                                                     Prirted: 4.5.2011
Project No. NCONWAO8. 0006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:247
posted:5/30/2011
language:English
pages:190